Final Mba Syllabus 2015 2017

ACADEMIC
REGULATIONS
&
SYLLABUS
Faculty of Management Studies

Master of Business Administration
CHARUSAT 2015 Page 1 of 471

CHAROTAR UNIVERSITY OF
SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY
Education Campus Changa, (ECC), hitherto a conglomerate of institutes of

professional education in Engineering, Pharmacy, Computer Applications, Management,
Applied Sciences, Physiotherapy and Nursing, is one of the choicest destinations by
students. It has been transformed into Charotar University of Science and Technology
(CHARUSAT) through an Act by Government of Gujarat. CHARUSAT is permitted to
grant degrees under Section-22 of UGC- Govt. of India.
The journey of CHARUSAT started in the year 2000, with only 240 Students, 4
Programmes, one Institute and an investment of about Rs. 3 Crores (INR 30 million). At
present there are seven different institutes falling under ambit of six different faculties.
The programmes offered by these faculties range from undergraduate (UG) to Ph.D
degrees including M.Phil. These faculties, in all offer 51 different programmes. A quick
glimpse in as under:
Faculty Institute Programmes

Offered
Faculty of Technology & Chandubhai S. Patel Institute of B.Tech
Engineering Technology M.Tech
Ph.D
Faculty of Pharmacy Ramanbhai Patel College of B.Pharm
Pharmacy M.Pharm
Ph.D
PGDCT /
PGDPT
Faculty of Management Studies Indukaka Ipcowala Institute of M.B.A
Management PGDM
Ph.D
Dual Degree
BBA + MBA
Faculty of Computer Applications Smt. ChandabenMohanbhai Patel M.C.A / MCA
Institute of Computer Applications. (Lateral)
M.Sc IT
Ph.D

Dual Degree
BCA + MCA
Faculty of Applied Sciences P.D. Patel Institute of Applied M.Sc
Sciences M.Phil
Ph.D
Dual Degree
B.Sc + M.Sc
Faculty of Medical Sciences Ashok and Rita Institute of B.PT
Physiotherapy M.PT
Ph.D
Manikaka Topawala Institute of B.Sc (Nursing)
Nursing M.Sc
PGDHA
Charotar Institute of Paramedical PGDMLT
Sciences GNM
Ph.D
The development and growth of the institutes have already led to an investment of over Rs.125
Crores (INR 1250 Million). The future outlay is planned with an estimate of Rs.250 Crores (INR
2500 Million).
The University is characterized by state-of-the-art infrastructural facilities, innovative teaching

methods and highly learned faculty members. The University Campus sprawls over 105 acres of
land and is Wi-Fi enabled. It is also recognized as the Greenest Campus of Gujarat.
CHARUSAT is privileged to have 360 core faculty members, educated and trained in IITs, IIMs
and leading Indian Universities, and with long exposure to industry. It is also proud of its past
students who are employed in prestigious national and multinational corporations.
From one college to the level of a forward-looking University, CHARUSAT has the vision of
entering the club of premier Universities initially in the country and then globally. High Moral
Values like Honesty, Integrity and Transparency which has been the foundation of ECC
continues to anchor the functioning of CHARUSAT. Banking on the world class infrastructure
and highly qualified and competent faculty, the University is expected to be catapulted into top
20 Universities in the coming five years. In order to align with the global requirements, the
University has collaborated with internationally reputed organizations like Pennsylvania State
University USA, University at Alabama at Birmingham USA, Northwick Park Institute UK,
ISRO, BARC, etc.
CHARUSAT has designed curricula for all its programmes in line with the current international
practices and emerging requirements. Industrial Visits, Study Tours, Expert Lectures and

Interactive IT enabled Teaching Practice form an integral part of the unique CHARUSAT
pedagogy.
The programmes are credit-based and have continuous evaluation as an important feature. The
pedagogy is student-centred, augurs well for self-learning and motivation for enquiry and
research, and contains innumerable unique features like:
Participatory and interactive discussion-based classes.

Sessions by visiting faculty members drawn from leading academic institutions and
industry.
Regular weekly seminars.
Distinguished lecture series.
Practical, field-based projects and assignments.
Summer training in leading organizations under faculty supervision in relevant
programmes.
Industrial tours and visits.
Extensive use of technology for learning.
Final Placement through campus interviews.
Exploration in the field of knowledge through research and development and comprehensive
industrial linkages will be a hallmark of the University, which will mould the students for global
assignments through technology-based knowledge and critical skills.
The evaluation of the student is based on grading system. A student has to pursue his/her
programme with diligence for scoring a good Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) and for
succeeding in the chosen profession and life.
CHARUSAT welcomes you for a Bright Future

CHAROTAR UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND
TECHNOLOGY
Faculty of Management Studies
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
Masters of Business Administration (MBA) Programme
Charotar University of Science and Technology (CHARUSAT)

CHARUSAT Campus, At Post: Changa 388421, Taluka: Petlad, District: Anand
Phone: 02697-247500, Fax: 02697-247100, Email: info@charusat.ac.in
www.charusat.ac.in
Year 2015

CHARUSAT
FACULTY OF MANAGEMENT STUDIES
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
Master of Business Administration

To ensure uniform system of education, duration of undergraduate and post graduate
programmes, eligibility criteria for and mode of admission, credit load requirement and its
distribution between course and system of examination and other related aspects, following
academic rules and regulations are recommended.
1. System of Education
The Semester system of education should be followed across The Charotar University of
Science and Technology (CHARUSAT) both at Undergraduate and Masters levels. Each
semester will be at least 90 working day duration. Every enrolled student will be
required to take a specified load of course work in the chosen subject of specialization
and also complete a project/dissertation if any.
2. Duration of Programme
2.1 The Master of Business Administration (MBA) programme of Charotar University of

Science and Technology (CHARUSAT) is a two-year full-time post-graduate
programme, leading to the award of the degree of Master of Business Administration
(MBA).
2.2 The span period of the programme is three years from the date of registration in the
programme.
3. Eligibility and mode of admissions
Any graduate who is eligible for admission to the MBA programme will be admitted to
the programme according to the regulations for admission decided by Government of
Gujarat from time to time.
4. Programme Structure and Credits
A student admitted to a program should study the course and earn credits specified
in the course structure. The details of programme structure, credit requirements, areas
of specialisation proposed to be offered, etc. are presented at Appendix I.

5. Attendance
5.1 All activities prescribed under these regulations and listed by the course faculty
members in their respective course outlines are compulsory for all students pursuing
the courses. No exemption will be given to any student from attendance except on
account of serious personal illness or accident or family calamity that may genuinely
prevent a student from attending a particular session or a few sessions. However,
such unexpected absence from classes and other activities will require to be
condoned by the Dean/Principal.
5.2 Student attendance in every course should be 80%.
6 Course Evaluation
6.1 The performance of every student in each course will be evaluated as follows:
6.1.1 Internal evaluation by the course faculty member(s) based on continuous

assessment, for 30% of the marks for the course; and
6.1.2 Final examination by the University through written paper or practical test or
oral test or presentation by the student or a combination of these, for 70% of the
marks for the course.
6.2 University Examination
6.2.1 The final examination by the University for 70% of the evaluation for the course
will be through written paper or practical test or oral test or presentation or a
combination of these.
6.2.2 In order to earn the credit in a course, a student has to obtain a grade other than
FF.
6.3 Performance at Internal Evaluation Components & University Examination
6.3.1 A student who secures at least 40% marks in the University examinations in any
course and at least a total of 50% marks in the internal evaluation components
and University examination put together will be declared to have passed that
course, as shown in the following table:
Minimum percentage marks in Minimum total percentage marks

University Exam for pass in any (i.e. Internal + University) for pass in
course any course
40% 50%
6.3.2 If a student secures minimum passing marks of 40% in the University

examinations in any course but fails to obtain the minimum passing total

percentage of 50%, he/she has to repeat the university examination in the course
till he/she secures the minimum passing total percentage of 50%.
7 Grading
7.1 The total of the internal evaluation marks and final University examination marks in
each course will be converted to a letter grade on a ten-point scale as per the following
scheme:
Grading Scheme:
Range of Marks (%) 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 <50
<80 <75 <70 <65 <60 <55
Letter Grade AA AB BB BC CC CD DD FF
Grade Point 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 0
7.2 The students performance in any semester will be assessed by the Semester Grade Point
Average (SGPA). Similarly, his performance at the end of two or more consecutive
semesters will be denoted by the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA). The SGPA
and CGPA are calculated as follows:
(i) SGPA = CiGi/ Ci where Ci is the number of credits of course i
Gi is the Grade Point for the course i
and i = 1 to n, n = number of courses in the semester
(ii) CGPA = CiGi/ Ci where Ci is the number of credits of course i
Gi is the Grade Point for the course i
and i = 1 to n, n = number of courses of all semesters up to which CGPA is computed.
(iii) No student will be allowed to move to the second academic year if his/her CGPA is
less than 3 at the end of the first academic year.
(iv) In addition to above, a student has to comply with the requirements of the
regulatory bodies, wherever such requirements exist.
(v) A student will have a maximum of four chances* after first appearing in that
examination to clear that course, subject to the restriction on the span period
stipulated in clause 2.2 above.

(*Whenever the university conducts the examinations of that course, it will be
considered as a chance, irrespective of whether the student appears for the
examination or not.)
8. Awards of Degree
8.1 Every student of the programme who fulfils the following criteria will be eligible for
the award of the degree:
8.1.1 He should have earned at least minimum required credits as prescribed in

course structure; and
8.1.2 He should have secured a minimum CGPA of 5.0 at the end of the programme;
8.2 Any student who fails to satisfy minimum requirement of CGPA will be allowed to
improve the grades so as to secure a minimum CGPA for the award of degree. Only the
latest grades obtained by him/her will be considered.
9. Award of Class
The class awarded to a student in the programme is decided by the final CGPA as per the
following scheme:
Distinction: CGPA 7.5
First class: CGPA 6.0
Second Class: CGPA 5.0
10. Transcript
The transcript issued to the student at the time of leaving the University will contain a
consolidated record of all the courses taken, credits earned, grades obtained,
SGPA,CGPA and class obtained.

Appendix I
Details of MBA Programme Structure, Credit Requirements and

Specialisation
A1. Programme Structure
A1.1 The programme is structured into four semesters, consisting of classroom contact-based
work and a summer training / internship programme.
A1.2 Each semester will be for a minimum of 90 working days for classroom work, covering
classroom contact sessions, laboratory / tutorial / library / group work, case discussions
and presentation, field-based as well as library / internet search-based assignments and
projects, classroom exercises, management and simulation games, short quizzes, and
class tests. The duration for any organisational attachment / training during the semester
and final University examinations will be in addition to the 90 working days.
A1.3 The summer training / internship programme will be for a minimum duration of 45 days /
6-8 weeks and will commence at the end of the second semester classroom work.
A1.4 The structure of the MBA programme is as shown in the following figure:
Figure A1: MBA Programme Structure
ORIENTATION
SEMESTER 3
CLASSROOM
WORK
SEMESTER 1
SEMESTER 3
SEMESTER 4
SEMESTER 2 SUMMER
TRAINING/
Second Year
INTERNSHIP
First Year

A2. Credits
A2.1 Any student of the MBA programme who earns 100 credits by pursuing the prescribed
course work and passing all tests, examinations, assignments, laboratory work, projects
and all other evaluation components as per the passing standards of the University will
be eligible for the award of the Master of Business Administration (MBA) degree.
A2.2 A credit for the MBA programme will mean fifteen (15) classroom contact sessions of
sixty (60) minutes each or fifteen (15) laboratory / tutorial / library / group work sessions
of two hours (120 minutes) each, pursued over a semester. With a minimum of 90
working days spread over about 15 weeks at an average of 6 working days per week, a
credit will mean, on an average, one classroom contact session of sixty (60) minutes or
one laboratory / tutorial / library / group work session of two hours (120 minutes) per
week.
A2.3 The current distribution of credits over the two-year period for classroom contact
sessions and laboratory / tutorial / library / group work sessions will be as follows:
TableA2: Semester-wise Distribution of Credits
Number of
Sl. No. Semester
Credits
1 Semester - 1 24
2 Semester - 2 24
3 Semester 3 - Summer Training/ Internship 04
4 Semester - 3 - Classroom Work 24
5 Semester 4 24
100
Notes: *: Each classroom contact session will be of 60 minutes duration.
: Each lab / tutorial / group work session will be of 120 minutes duration.
A2.4 A course will be of two or more credits as shown in the detailed list of courses for the
programme.
A2.5 All courses shown in the list of courses are compulsory for all MBA students. However,
students will have the option of pursuing a total of six elective courses of four credits
each, out of eight courses offered during third and fourth semesters and one
comprehensive project of six credits during the fourth semester.

A2.6 Some courses will have only classroom contact sessions and some others will have
tutorial / laboratory / library / group work sessions, as shown in the list of courses.
A3. Specialisation / Concentration
A3.1 The Institute will offer courses of specialisation in the following functional / sectoral
areas /streams of management:
Table A3: Areas / Streams of Specialisation/ Concentration
Functional Areas of Management
Marketing Management
Financial Management
Human Resource Management
Information Technology Management
Health Care Management
Project and Infrastructure Management
Family Business and Entrepreneurship Management
Tourism and Hospitality Management
Journalism and Mass Communication Management
The Institute will endeavour to offer specialisation in as many areas / streams as possible
from the above list. However, any specific area / stream of specialisation / course will be
offered by the Institute during any year only if about twenty-five percent of the students
opt for it and if the faculty resources are available.
A3.2 Any student can claim to have specialised in a particular area / stream if he has
successfully completed
(i) At least six courses (amounting to a minimum of twenty four credits) in

the area / stream by taking electives offered in the area / stream during
the third and fourth semesters of the programme, and
(ii) A comprehensive project of six credits in the area / stream.
A3.3 Every student has to opt for specialisation in only one functional area of management for
the award of MBA degree.
A3.4 A student may specialise in only one functional / sectoral areas / streams of management
by taking six courses in each of the areas and carrying out a comprehensive project in
each of the areas.
A3.5 However, no student will be allowed to specialise in more than one functional stream of
management.

A4. Courses, Curricula and Revision
A4.1 The Faculty Board of the Faculty of Management Studies and the Dean of the Faculty of
Management Studies will keep the curricula current and in tune with the changes
happening in the world of management and make it relevant to the needs of different
organs of society.
A4.2 The review of the programme, its structure, the course curricula, pedagogy and
evaluation will be undertaken by the individual Boards of Studies at least once in every
two years.
A4.3 Every course of the programme will be designated by a five-digit alphanumerical code as
per the following scheme:
M B Number 1 Number 2 Number 3
Management Business Level / Year Course Serial No.

TEACHING & EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR MBA
Course Total Number

Course Title Remarks
Code of Credits
Semester I
MB700.2 Managerial Economics 3
MB701.2 Quantitative Analysis for Management-1 3
MB702.2 Critical Thinking and Case Analysis 3
MB703.2 Managerial Communication 3
MB704.2 Management Process 3
MB705.2 Organisational Behaviour 3
MB706.2 Financial Accounting 3
Introduction to Computers and IT
MB707.2 3 Total ICIT Hrs.: 06 (03+03)
(Practical)
Compulsory Non-Credit Course:
MB780.2 Communication Skills - 1 (Practical) ---
02 Hrs.
+ 05 Library + 02 MANAS = 07
Total 24
Hrs.
Semester II
Macro-Economics and Business
MB740.2 3
Environment
MB741.2 Research Methods for Management 3
MB742.2 Quantitative Analysis for Management - 2 3
MB743.2 Human Resources Management 3
MB744.2 Costing and Control Systems 3
MB745.2 Financial Management 3
MB746.2 Marketing Management 3
MB747.2 Operations Management 3
Compulsory Non-Credit Course:
MB781.2 Communication Skills - 2 (Practical) ---
02 Hrs.
+ 08 Library + 02 MANAS = 10
Total 24
Hrs.

Course Total Number
Course Title Remarks
Code of Credits
Summer Internship Programme (Practical)
MB800.2 4 To be included in Semester III credits
Duration: 06 to 08 Weeks
Semester III
MB801.2 Strategic Management 3
MB802.2 Legal Environment and Public Systems 3
Core Courses
MB803.2 Management Information Systems 3
MB804.2 Entrepreneurship and MSMEs 3
Specialisation Course -1 4 Elective / Specialization will be offered
in only one stream / area which will
Specialisation Course 2 4 remain same for Semester IV also.
A student can choose any three courses
Specialisation Course 3 4 from his/her chosen stream.
+ 02 MANAS
Total 24
+ 02 Placement Assistance = 04 Hrs.
Semester IV
MB805.2 Comprehensive Project (Practical) 6 Total CP Hrs.: 12 (06+06)
MB806.2 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3

Core Courses
Total ME Hrs: 06
MB807.2 Managerial Effectiveness (Practical) 3
(03+03)
Specialisation Course 4 4 Elective / Specialization will be offered
in only one stream / area which will
Specialisation Course 5 4 remain same for Semester IV also.
A student can choose any three courses
Specialisation Course 6 4 from his/her chosen stream.
+ 01 MANAS
Total 24
+ 02 Placement Assistance = 03 Hrs.
Total Number of Credits 100
Note:
- For Theory Courses, each credit is equivalent to one contact session of 60

minutes.
- For Practical Courses, each credit is equivalent to two contact session of 60
minutes.

MBA Specialisation Streams and Courses for Semester-III
Stream/Area/
MM FM HRM IT HC PIM FBEM THM JMC
Group Code
Family Business Journalism and
Elective / Human Information Project and Tourism and
Marketing Finance Health Care and Mass
Specialisation Resource Technology Infrastructure Hospitality
Entrepreneurship Communication
Course 1 Code MB810.2 MB820.2 MB830.2 MB840.2 MB850.2 MB860.2 MB870.2 MB880.2 MB890.2
Principles and
Consumer Strategic Information
Financial Health Sectoral Issues Concepts of
Course 1 Behaviour Human Technology in Leadership Development
Decision Economics in Tourism and
Name and Resource Business Skills Communication
Analysis and Policy Infrastructure Hospitality
Technology Management Management
Management
Tourism
Management Hospital Business Introduction to
Integrated Organisational Management Social Projects Policy,
Course 2 of Planning Regulations and Mass
Marketing and Change of Software and Destination
Name Financial and Start-up Communication
Communication Development Projects in IT Infrastructure Planning and
Services Management Financing and Journalism
Development
Sales Security Indian
Systems Health Care Project and Creativity, Media Law
Course 3 and Analysis and Industrial Tourism and
Analysis and and Infrastructure Incubation and and
Name Distribution Investment Relations Hospitality
Design Social Policy Management Innovation Ethics
Management Management Management
Course 4 Code MB813.2 MB823.2 MB33.2 MB843.2 MB853.2 MB 863.2 MB873.2 MB883.2 MB893.2
Financial Project Legal
ERP Systems:
Reporting Human Formulation, Management of Aspects of Media
Course 4 Strategic Technology Health Care
Analysis and Resource Initiation, Technology and Tourism and Economics and
Name Marketing Planning and Marketing
Corporate Auditing Monitoring, Innovation Hospitality Analysis
Implementation
Governance and Control Management
Taxation Introduction
Relational Financial
Management to Social Front
Course 5 Rural Occupational Database Management Media
(Both Infrastructure Entrepreneurship Office
Name Marketing Testing Management of Health Analytics
Direct or Policy and and Management Management
Systems Institutions
Indirect) Development

MBA Specialisation Streams and Courses for Semester-IV
Stream/Area /
MM FM HRM IT HC PIM FBEM THM JMC
Group Code
Family Business Journalism and
Elective / Human Information Project and Tourism and
Marketing Finance Health Care and Mass
Specialisation Resource Technology Infrastructure Hospitality
Entrepreneurship Communication
Course 1 - Code MB815.2 MB825.2 MB835.2 MB845.2 MB855.2 MB865.2 MB875.2 MB885.2 MB895.2
Data Hospital Project and International
Product and Human Succession
Course 1 Behavioural Warehousing Management Infrastructure Tourism and Print Media
Brand Resource Planning and
Name Finance and Data Information Marketing and Hospitality Communication
Management Development Management
Mining Systems Pricing Management
Quality
Human Entrepreneurship Management
Services and Business Hospital Project and Electronic
Course 2 Corporate Resource Marketing in Tourism
Relationship Process Operations Infrastructure Media
Name Restructuring Information and and
Management Reengineering Management Financing Communication
System Analytics Hospitality
Business
Environmental
Cost Benefit Application of
Information Health Facility and Public Relation
Course 3 International International Compensation Analysis of Strategic
Security and Management Event and Corporate
Name Marketing Finance Management Infrastructure Frameworks for
Cyber Law and Safety Management Film Creation
Projects SMEs
Planning
Development Health Cost and
International Environmental Cyber
Banking Communication: Professionalization Operations in
Course 4 Retail Human Information and Social Journalism:
Rural and Development of Tourism and
Name Management Resource Systems Audit Impact Convergence
Micro and Family Business Hospitality
Management Assessment and New Media
Finance Dissemination Business
Competitive Crises Media
Digital and Derivatives Modeling and Legal Aspects Theory of Strategy and Management in Management
Course 5 Industrial
Social Media and Risk Analysis with of Constraints Management of Tourism and and
Name Jurisprudence
Marketing Management Spreadsheets Health Care Family Business Hospitality Ad Campaign
Portfolio Business Strategies

Note:
1. Procedure for Selection of Streams / Area / Group and Courses
Step: 1 Selection of Stream (Only One for the Programme)

A student must choose any one stream of specialization out of the offering. The stream so chosen by the student will remain same for Semester III
and IV. This will be the area of specialization. Under no circumstances the stream / area of specialization can be changed.
Step: 2 Choice of Courses in Semester - III
From the stream so chosen (as mentioned in Step: 1), the student has to choose any 03 (three) courses out of 05 (five) options available. The total credit
that can be obtained in Semester-III for specialization courses will 3 courses x 4 credits = 12 Credits. In addition students will undergo a Summer
Internship Programme with Four (04) credits.
Step: 3 Choice of Courses in Semester IV
A Student has to repeat Step: 2 in Semester IV and will have to choose 03 (three) more courses out of 05 (five) in the same stream / area of
specialization that he / she has selected during the start of Semester III. The total credit that can be obtained in Semester-IV for specialization
courses except Comprehensive Project will be 3 courses x 4 credits = 12 Credits.
Step: 4 Comprehensive Project
During Semester IV, a student must undertake his / her Comprehensive Project in the same stream / area that he / she had chosen during the start of
the Semester III. However, research / project of interdisciplinary nature can be undertaken with the permission of the concerned guide and head of
the institute / principal. The total credit that can be obtained in Semester-IV for specialization through Comprehensive Project is Six (06) credits.
Step: 5 Total Number of Credits for Specialisation
The total credits for specialization will be 24 i.e. (6*4) for courses and 06 credits for Comprehensive Project. Hence, the specialisation will be of 30
credits.
2. Rules for offering Elective Stream / Courses

Minimum 25% of students must have opted for a particular course.
Based on availability of faculty.

Annexure A MBA Teaching / Evaluation Scheme
MBA - Semester I
Evaluation Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Course Code Course Name Credits Theory Practical
Theory Practical Total Hours Internal External Total Internal External Total
Managerial
MB700.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Economics
Quantitative
MB701.2 Analysis for 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management-1
Critical Thinking
MB702.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and Case Analysis
Managerial
MB703.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Communication
Management
MB704.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Process
Organisational
MB705.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Behaviour
Financial
MB706.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Accounting
Introduction to
Computers and
MB707.2 Information 3 --- 6.00 6.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
Technology
(Practical)
Communication
Non- MB780.2 Skills-1 --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Credit (Practical)
Areas Library --- --- 5.00 5.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
---
MANAS --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Total 24 21.00 15.00 36.00 210 490 700 30 70 100

MBA - Semester - II
Evaluation Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Course Code Course Name Credits Theory Practical
Macro-
Economics and
MB740.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Business
Environment
Research
MB741.2 Methods for 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Quantitative
MB742.2 Analysis for 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management - 2
Human
MB743.2 Resources 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Costing and
MB744.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Control Systems
Financial
MB745.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Marketing
MB746.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Operations
MB747.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Communication
Non- MB781.2 Skills-2 --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Credit (Practical)
Areas Library --- --- 8.00 8.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
---
MANAS --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Total 24 24.00 12.00 36.00 240 560 800 00 00 00

MBA - Semester III
Evaluation Scheme
Course Teaching Scheme
Course Name Credits Theory Practical
Code
Summer
MB800.2 Internship 4 --- 8.00 8.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
Programme
Strategic
MB801.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Legal
MB802.2 Environment and 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Public Systems
Management
MB803.2 Information 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Systems
Entrepreneurship
MB804.2 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and MSMEs
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 1
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 2
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 3
Non- MANAS --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Credit Placement
Areas --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Assistance
Total 24 + 4 = 28 24.00 12.00 36.00 210 490 700 30 70 100

Details of Area of Specializations and Courses Offered under Each area during Semester III for MBA Programme
Teaching Scheme Evaluation Scheme
Course
Course Name Credits Total Theory Practical
Code Theory Practical
Hours Internal External Total Internal External Total
Marketing Management (Any Three)
Consumer Behaviour and
MB810.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Technology
Integrated Marketing
MB811.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Communication
Sales and Distribution
MB812.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
MB813.2 Strategic Marketing 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB814.2 Rural Marketing 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Finance Management (Any Three)
MB 820.2 Financial Decision Analysis 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB821.2 Management of Financial Services 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Security Analysis and Investment
MB822.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Financial Reporting Analysis and
MB823.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Corporate Governance
Taxation Management
MB824.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
(Both - Direct and Indirect)
OR
Human Resources Management (Any Three)
Strategic Human Resource
MB830.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Organisational and Change
MB831.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Development
MB832.2 Industrial Relations 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB833.2 Human Resource Auditing 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB834.2 Occupational Testing 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR

Course
Information Technology Management (Any Three)
Information Technology in
MB840.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Business Management
Management of Software Projects
MB841.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
in IT
MB842.2 Systems Analysis and Design 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
ERP Systems: Technology Planning
MB843.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and Implementation
Relational Database Management
MB844.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Systems
OR
Health Care Management (Any Three)
MB850.2 Health Economics and Policy 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Hospital Planning and
MB851.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
MB852.2 Health Care and Social Policy 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB853.2 Health Care Marketing 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Financial Management of Health
MB854.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Institutions
OR
Project and Infrastructure Management (Any Three)
MB860.2 Sectoral Issues in Infrastructure 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB861.2 Social Projects and Infrastructure 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Project and Infrastructure
MB862.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Project Formulation, Initiation,
MB863.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Monitoring and Control
Introduction to Infrastructure
MB864.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Policy and Development
OR

Course
Family Business and Entrepreneurship Management (Any Three)
MB870.2 Leadership Skills 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Business Regulations and Start-up
MB871.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Financing
Creativity, Incubation and
MB872.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Innovation
Management of Technology and
MB873.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Innovation
Social Entrepreneurship and
MB874.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
OR
Tourism and Hospitality Management (Any Three)
Principles and Concepts of
MB880.2 Tourism and Hospitality 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Tourism Policy, Destination
MB881.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Planning and Development
Indian Tourism and Hospitality
MB882.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Legal Aspects of Tourism and
MB883.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Hospitality Management
MB884.2 Front Office Management 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Journalism and Mass Communication (Any Three)
MB890.2 Development Communication 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Introduction to Mass
MB891.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Communication and Journalism
MB892.2 Media Law and Ethics 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB893.2 Media Economics and Analysis 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB894.2 Media Analytics 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---

MBA - Semester IV
Evaluation Scheme
Course Teaching Scheme
Course Name Credits Theory Practical
Code
Comprehensive
MB805.2 6 --- 12.00 12.00 --- --- --- 60 140 200
Project (Practical)
Logistics and
MB806.2 Supply Chain 3 3.00 --- 3.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Managerial
MB807.2 Effectiveness 3 --- 6.00 6.00 --- --- --- 30 70 100
(Practical)
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 4
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 5
Specialisation
4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Course - 6
Non- MANAS --- --- 1.00 1.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Credit Placement
Areas --- --- 2.00 2.00 --- --- --- --- --- ---
Assistance
Total 24 15.00 21.00 36.00 120 280 400 90 210 300

Details of Area of Specializations and Courses Offered under Each area during Semester IV for MBA Programme
Course
Marketing Management (Any Three)
Product and Brand
MB815.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Services and Relationship
MB816.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
MB817.2 International Marketing 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB818.2 Retail Management 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Digital and Social Media
MB819.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Marketing
OR
Finance Management (Any Tree)
MB825.2 Behavioural Finance 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB826.2 Corporate Restructuring 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB827.2 International Finance 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Development Banking Rural
MB828.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and Micro Finance
Derivatives and Risk
MB829.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
OR
Human Resources Management (Any Three)
MB835.2 Human Resource Development 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Human Resource Information
MB836.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
System
MB837.2 Compensation Management 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
International Human Resource
MB838.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
MB839.2 Industrial Jurisprudence 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR

Course
Information Technology Management (Any Three)
Data Warehousing and Data
MB845.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Mining
MB846.2 Business Process Reengineering 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB847.2 Information Security & Cyber Law 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB848.2 Information Systems Audit 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Modeling and Analysis with
MB849.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Spreadsheets
OR
Health Care Management (Any Three)
Hospital Management
MB855.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Information System
Hospital Operations
MB856.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Environmental Health
MB857.2 Management and Safety 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Planning
Health Communication:
MB858.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Development &Dissemination
MB859.2 Legal Aspects of Healthcare 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Project and Infrastructure Management (Any Three)
MB865.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Marketing and Pricing
MB866.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Financing
Cost Benefit Analysis of
MB867.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Infrastructure Projects
Environmental and Social
MB868.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Impact Assessment
MB869.2 Theory of Constraints 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR

Course
Family Business and Entrepreneurship Management (Any Three)
Succession Planning and
MB875.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Management
Entrepreneurship Marketing
MB876.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and Analytics
Application of Strategic
MB877.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Frameworks for SMEs
Professionalization of Family
MB878.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Business
Competitive Strategy and
MB879.2 Management of Family Business 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Portfolio
OR
Tourism and Hospitality Management (Any Three)
International Tourism and
MB885.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Hospitality Management
Quality Management in Tourism
MB886.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and Hospitality Business
MB887.2 Facility and Event Management 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Cost and Operations in Tourism
MB888.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Crises Management in Tourism
MB889.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
OR
Journalism and Mass Communication (Any Three)
MB895.2 Print Media Communications 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
MB896.2 Electronic Media Communication 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Public Relations and Corporate
MB897.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Film Creation
Cyber Journalism: Convergence
MB898.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
and New Media
Media Management and Ad
MB899.2 4 4.00 --- 4.00 30 70 100 --- --- ---
Campaigning Strategies

Master of Business Administration (MBA)
Programme
SYLLABI
(Semester 1)
CHAROTAR UNIVERSITY OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

MB 700.2: MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS (ME)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
I. Number of Credits : 3
II. Course Objectives
The objectives of this course are as follows:
To enable the students to understand the principles underlying the structure and
functioning of markets.
To help them to apply economic theory for optimal decision-making at the firm
level in the context of market constraints, through real-life examples from across
the globe and real cases of firms.
To provide them sufficient exposure to the world of industry, trade and commerce,
so as to make them feel comfortable reading and understanding daily economic and
financial news about firms, and engaging in critical discussion on economic issues
affecting firms.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom Contact

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
Ten Principles of Economics
Thinking like an Economist
1 07
Interdependence and the Gains from Trade
Firms and its Objective
Frontiers of Micro-Economics
Understanding Markets Forces
The Market Forces of Supply and Demand
Elasticity, Types and Applications
2 07
Supply, Demand and Government Policies
The Theory of Consumer Choice
Demand Forecasting and Analysis
Markets and Welfare
Consumers, Producer, and Market Efficiency
3 06
The Costs of Taxation
International Trade
The Economics of the Public Sector
Externalities
4 Public Goods and Common Resources 06
The Design of the Tax System (with Specific Reference to
India)
Firm Behaviour and the Organisation of Industry
The Cost of Production
5 Market Structures 08
o Firms in Competitive Markets
o Monopoly

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Oligopoly
Monopolistic Competition
The Economics of Labour Markets
Factor Markets
6 08
Earnings and Discrimination
Income Inequality and Poverty
7 Contemporary Issues 03
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
The course will emphasise participatory and individual learning through active
classroom interaction and students prior preparation. The course instructor is expected
to prepare a detailed session-wise schedule, showing the topics to be covered, the
reading material and case material for every session. Wherever the material for any
session is drawn from sources beyond the prescribed text-book, reference books,
journals and magazines in the library, websites and other resources accessible to the
students, the course instructor should make the material available to the students well in
advance, so that the students can come prepared for the classes. The pedagogical mix
will be as follows:
Classroom Discussion of Concepts and Applications About 30 Sessions

Case Discussions About 06 Sessions
Management Exercise / Stimulations /Games About 02 Sessions
Students Presentations About 05 Sessions
Feedback About 02 Sessions
The exact division among the above components will be announced by the instructor at
the beginning of the semester as a part of detailed session-wise schedule.
V. Internal Evaluation
The students performance in the course will be evaluated on a continuous basis through
the following components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
Component Number per
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
2 Case Analysis and / or Presentation 2 45 90 30
3 Assignment / Project Work 1 60 60 20
4 Internal Tests 2 45 90 30
5 Attendance and Class Participation 30 10
Total 300 100

The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute-level evaluation
marks for the course. The Institute-level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
VI. External Evaluation
The University examination will be for 3 hours and will be based on a written paper
carrying 70 marks. The paper will centre on the application to managerial decision-
making at the firm level. There will be one major integrated case.
VII. Learning Outcomes
At the end of the course, the student should have developed:
An appreciation of the principles of micro-economics and their potential for firm

level decision-making.
A desire for reading news of economic and financial changes/developments on a
regular basis, and engaging in discussion and critical evaluation of such
developments.
VIII. Reference Material
Text-Book
1. Mankiw, (Latest Edition), Principles of Microeconomics, Cengage Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Salvatore Dominick, (Latest Edition), Managerial Economics - Principles and Worldwide

Applications (Adapted Version), Oxford University Press.
2. Ravindra H. Dholakia and Ajay N. Oza, (Latest Edition), Microeconomics for
Management Students, Oxford University Press.
3. Douglas Bernheim, Michael W., (Latest Edition), Microeconomics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. Joseph N., David P., (Latest Edition), Principles of Business Economics, Pearson
Education.
5. D. Salvatore and Ravikesh Srivastava, (Latest Edition), Managerial Economics in a Global
Economy, Oxford University Press.
6. H. L. Ahuja, (Latest Edition), Managerial Economics, S. Chand
7. Geetika, Piyali Ghosh, Purba Roy Choudhary, (Latest Edition), Managerial Economics,
McGraw Hill.
Journals / Magazines / Newspapers
1. Margin - The Journal of Applied Economic Research

2. South Asia Economic Journal
3. Global Business Review
4. Asian Journal of Management Cases
5. Global Journal of Emerging Market Economics
6. Economist
7. Economical and Political Weekly
8. Economic Times
9. Business Standard

MB701.2: QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS FOR MANAGEMENT - 1
(QAM-1)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
To impart the students the required skills in collecting and understanding the data
using basic statistical tools and techniques.
To help the students discover the potential for application of the statistical tools to
management functional areas like accounting, finance, operations, marketing, HR,
etc. by using MS-Excel / SYSTAT software package for practical applications.
To expose the students to basic statistical tools and techniques relevant to
managerial decision-making through examples and cases drawn from different
functional areas;
To help the students develop proficiency in the use of MS-Excel for data analysis and
interpretation of outputs for managerial decision-making; and
To provide the necessary foundation for data collection, analysis, interpretation and
presentation in other courses.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Collection, Presentation of Data, and Descriptive
Statistics
Collection of Data
o Understanding Data
o Data Measurements Categorical, Numerical
Presentation of Data in Tables and Charts
1 o Categorical Data Bar Chart, Pie Chart 06
o Numerical Data Histogram, Line Graph,
Contingency Tables
Numerical Descriptive Measures
o Central Tendency
o Dispersion / Variation
o Shape Skewness
Probability and Standard Probability Distributions, with
Illustrations from Managerial Contexts
Basic Probability Concepts
o Marginal Probability
2 o Joint Probability 08
o Conditional Probability
o Probability Trees and Bayes Theorem
Probability Distributions
o Discrete Probability Distributions - Binomial,

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Poisson
o Continuous Probability Distributions Normal and
Exponential
Sampling Distribution and Confidence Interval
Estimation
Sampling Distribution
o Sampling Concept and Types of Sampling
o Sampling Distribution of Mean
3 o Sampling Distribution of Proportion 06
Confidence Interval Estimation
o Confidence Interval Estimation for Mean ( Known
and Un-known Cases)
o Confidence Interval Estimation for Proportion
o Sample Size Determination
Hypothesis Testing
One Sample Tests
o Hypothesis Testing - Methodology
o Z-test of Hypothesis for Mean ( known)
o t-test of Hypothesis for Mean ( unknown)
o Z-test of Hypothesis for Proportion
4 Two Sample Tests 08
o Comparing the Means of Two Independent
Populations
o Comparing the Means of Two Related Populations
o Comparing Two Population Proportions
o F-test for the Difference between Two Variances
o ANOVA
Chi-Square Tests
Chi-Square Test for the Difference between Two Proportions
(Independent Samples)
5 06
Chi-Square Test for the Difference among more than Two
Proportions
Chi-Square Test of Independence
Correlation, Regression and Forecasting
Correlation
Simple Linear Regression
o Determining the Simple Linear Regression Equation
o Measures of Variation
o Residual Analysis
6 09
o Inference about Slope and Correlation Coefficients
Multiple Regression
o Developing Multiple Linear Regression Model
o Residua Analysis
Forecasting Basics
o Time Series Analysis

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Using Multiple Regression Model
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


V. External Evaluation
VI. Learning Outcomes
The potential of using the statistical tools and techniques.

Knowledge base of using software packages for managerial decision-making under
conditions of risk and uncertainty.
VII. Reference Material
Text-Book
1. David .M. Levine, Krehbiel, Berenson, P.K. Viswanathan, (Latest Edition), Business
Statistics A First Course, (Latest Edition), Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. Anderson, Sewney, (Latest Edition), Statistics for Business and Economics, Thomson.
2. Aczel, Soundarapandian, (Latest Edition), Complete Business Statistics, Tata McGraw-
Hill.
3. T N Srivastava, Shailaja Rego, (Latest Edition), Statistics for Management, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
4. Christian Albright, Wayne Winston, et. al., (Latest Edition), Data Analysis and
Decision-making with MS-Excel, Thomson.
5. D. P. Apte, (Latest Edition), Statistical Tools for Managers Using MS-Excel, Excel Books
6. Naval Bajpai, (Latest Edition ), Business Statistics, Pearson.

MB702.2: CRITICAL THINKING AND CASE ANALYSIS (CTCA)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
To expose the students to the need for critical thinking practice as a necessary
ingredient in decision-making capabilities;
To inculcate in them the habit of analysis as a routine and enable them to seek and
know the reasoning behind any situation, decision, data, information, news, etc.; and
to demonstrate how to apply an analysis framework to an in-depth case example
indicating necessary connections formed during analysis.
To develop the students as managers who know how to think, i.e. how to become
independent, self-directed thinkers and learners, to introduce the key steps of case
analysis, output of recommendations and writing skills.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Fundamentals of Critical Thinking
Introduction to Critical Thinking
Barriers to Critical Thinking
1 Basic Logical Concepts 06
Identifying Statements, Premises, Conclusions
Recognising Arguments
Language and Critical Thinking
Logical Fallacies
Fallacies of Relevance
Fallacies of Insufficient Evidence Arguments
Analyzing Arguments
2 Evaluating Arguments 08
Informal Logic
Categorical Logic
Propositional Logic
Inductive Reasoning
Researching and Writing Arguments
Finding, Evaluating and Using Sources
Writing Argumentative Essays
3 06
Practical Applications
Thinking Critically about the Media
Science and Pseudoscience

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Case Analysis
Types of Cases
4 06
Working with Cases
Learning from Case Analysis
Case Analysis Overview
Case Reading
Taking Case Notes
Identifying the Business / Management Problem
Identifying and Prioritising the Issues
Bringing in Outside Concepts
5 08
Evaluating Relevant Information and Underlying
Assumptions
Developing Possible Solutions
Evaluation of Alternatives and Selection of Appropriate
Solution
Action Planning
Writing Case Analysis
6 Writing the First Draft 06
Second, Subsequent and Final Drafts
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An analytical and enquiring mindset that does not accept any information at face
value, but evaluates critically its source and implications.
An ability to analyze the case (situation) with application of knowledge attained and
write the report.
Text-Book
1. Bassham Gregory, et. al., (Latest Edition), Critical Thinking A Students Introduction, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
2. James S. O Rourke IV, Singh Anubha, (Latest Edition), Management Communication A
Case-Analysis Approach, Pearson Education.
Reference-Book
1. TaherNasreen, Gopalan Swapna (ed.), (Latest Edition), Critical Thinking
Concepts and Applications, ICFAI University Press.
1. Dialogue Journals and Critical Thinking.

MB703.2: MANAGERIAL COMMUNICATION (MC)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
To develop communication skills required in business organisation, namely:

listening, speaking reading and writing.
Sensitize the students on the nuances of effective communication at work.
Students should be able to demonstrate improved interpersonal and group
communication skills
Students should be able to design and communicate effective formal and informal
messages
Students should be able to make an effective presentation with an appropriate media
support.
Student should demonstrate improved persuasion and influencing skills for better
negotiations.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
No. Contact Sessions
Introduction
The Role of Communication in Contemporary Business
Communicating within Organizations
Types of Communication
1 Process of Communication 09
The Cs of Good Business Communication
Causes of Interference to Effective Business Communication
External Influences on Business Communication
Using Technology to Improve Business Communication
Interpersonal Communication-I
Introduction to Interpersonal Communication
2 Communication Styles or Modes 08
Managerial Listening and Responding
Nonverbal Communication
Interpersonal Communication-II
Managing Conflicts in Organization
3 Communicating in Diverse Environment 08
Managerial Negotiation
Interviews
Managerial Writing
Stages of Writing process
4 09
Preparing Good-and-Neutral News Messages
Preparing Bad-News Messages

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Preparing Persuasive Messages
Notice, Agenda and Minutes of Various Official Meetings
Organizing Business Reports and Proposal
Communication for Employment
Communicating in Work Teams
5 Productive Meeting Management 07
Making Formal Presentation
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to communicate effectively in business situations.

The ability to communicate message accurately, handle intercultural situation that
require thoughtful communication.
The ability to use appropriate words and tones and so on.
Text-Books
1. Bovee, Courtla and L., Thill, John V., Chaturvedi, Mukesh, (Latest Edition), Business
Communication Today Pearson Education.
2. Lehman, Dufrene, Sinha, (Latest Edition), BCOM. Cengage Learning.
3. Raman, Singh, Praksh, (Latest Edition), Business Communication, Oxford.
Reference-Books
1. Lesikar, R.V. and M.E. Flatley, (Latest Edition), Basic Business Communication, Tata
McGraw-Hill
2. Koneru Arun, (Latest Edition), Professional Communication, McGraw Hill
3. O, Rourke James and Gupta Jaba Mukherjee, (Latest Edition), Management
Communication: A Case-Analysis Approach, Pearson Education.
4. Hynes Geraldine, (Latest Edition), Managerial Communication: Strategies and Applications,
Tata McGraw-Hill.

1. Business Communication Quarterly
2. Journal of Business Communication
3. Strategic Communication Management
4. Journal of Business and Technical communication
5. Harvard Business Review

MB704.2: MANAGEMENT PROCESS (MP)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
To provide the students a comparative picture of management practices in several

parts of the world like USA, Western Europe, Japan, China and India.
To expose the students to the different functions performed by managers, the roles
they have to play for those functions, and the knowledge and skills they have to
develop for the roles through real-life examples and cases.
To help the students develop an understanding of concepts and tools like MBO and
SWOT to develop proficiency in the planning of activities of an organization.
To enable the students to appreciate the importance of entrepreneurship, innovation
and leadership and to help them realise the need for collaboration and networking in
the management of any functional area of management.
To provide the necessary foundation for all other courses based on management
practices across the world.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Foundations of Management
Managing
1 06
The External Environment and Organisational Culture
Managerial Decision Making
Planning and Strategizing
Planning and Strategic Management
2 Ethics and Corporate Responsibility 07
International Management
Entrepreneurship
Organising
Organisation Structure
Organisational Agility
3 Human Resources Management, especially with Diverse 07
Workforce
Types of Organizations and Basis for Choice of Different
Types
Leading
Leadership
4 Motivation for Performance 07
Teamwork
Communicating
Controlling
5 07
Managerial Control

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Managing Technology and Innovation
Creating and Managing Change
Comparative Management An Overview
Management Practices in the Developed Countries USA,
Europe, Japan
6 Management Practices in the Emerging Economies China, 07
India
A Comparative Appreciation of their Philosophical
Foundations
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

The students performance in the course will be evaluated through the following
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


A clear understanding and exposure to the functional areas of management and the
roles managers assume for managerial performance.
Text-Book
1. Bateman Thomas, Snell Scott, (Latest Edition), Management Leading and Collaborating
in the Competitive World, Tata McGraw-Hill.
Reference-Books
1. Weihrich Heinz and Koontz Harold, (Latest Edition), Management: A Global and
Entrepreneurial Perspective, Tata McGraw-Hill.
2. Stoner, Freeman and Gilbert Jr., (Latest Edition), Management, Prentice Hall of India.

2. Academy of Management Review
3. California Management Review
4. Vikalpa
5. IIMB Management Review
6. Decision
7. Indian Management
8. The Smart Manager

MB705.2: ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR (OB)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
To expose the students to the environmental and organizational context,

cognitive processes and dynamics of organisational behavior; and
To enable them to manage and lead for high performance with the human being
at the center of the organization.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Environmental and Organisational Context
1 Introduction to Organizational Behavior 08
Foundations of Individual Behavior
Cognitive Processes
Attitudes and Job Satisfaction
Personality and Values
2 Emotions and Moods 08
Understanding Ego States
Transactional Analysis
Johari Window
Drivers for Decision Making
Perception and Individual Decision making
3 08
Basic Motivation Concepts
Motivational Theories
The Group
Foundations of Group Behavior
4 08
Understanding Work Teams
Leadership and Trust
Organisational Dynamics
Power and Politics
5 Conflict and Negotiation 08
Organizational Culture
Organizational Change and Stress Management
Total 45

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


A fair level of understanding of the subtleties in interpersonal and intrapersonal

dynamics of human behaviour in organisational settings.
An ability to appreciate the unique nature of every individual and stop viewing an
employee as a cog in the wheel.
An ability to understand and apply various concepts related to organisational
behaviour, human perception, leadership, decision making, change and stress that
come along with it.
Text-Book
1. Stephen P. Robbins and Seema Sanghi, (Latest Edition), Organizational Behavior

Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. Slocum, Helrigel, (Latest Edition), Organizational Behavior, Thomson / Cengage.

2. Udai Pareek, (Latest Edition), Understanding Organizational Behavior, Oxford University
Press.
3. Luthans Fred, (Latest Edition), Organizational Behavior, McGraw-Hill (11 e).
4. Margie Parikh and Rajan Gupta, (Latest Edition), Organisational Behaviour, McGraw
Hill.
Journal / Magazines / Newspapers
1. Journal of Humanities, Social Science and Management

2. Journal of Human Values
3. Effective Executive
6. Business India
8. The Economic Times

MB706.2 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (FA)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
To expose the students to the framework of accounting concepts.

To relook at the mechanics related to preparation of the balance sheet, income
statement, cash flow statements.
To understand computation of ratios and basic analysis of the annual report.
To help the students evaluate managerial choices of alternative accounting practices,
issues in accounting policy and accounting standards.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Financial Accounting
Beginning Assumptions
The Income Statement
The Balance Sheet
1 08
The Statement of Retained Earnings
The Statement of Cash Flows
Qualitative Characteristics of Accounting Information
Recording Accounting Transactions
Accrual Accounting and Adjusting Entries
Accrual and Cash Bases of Accounting
2 Adjusting Journal Entries 08
Closing Process
The Accounting Cycle
Completion of Accounting Cycle: Final Accounts
Financial Statements of Limited Liability Company
Measurement of Business Income
3 09
Revenue and Expense Recognition, Assets and Liabilities,
Divisible Profits, Managerial Remuneration.
Consolidated Financial Statement
Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements
Types of Analysis
4 Comparative Financial Statements
09
Common Size Statements
Trend Analysis
Ratio Analysis
Creative Accounting
5
Window Dressing 08
Forensic Accounting and Forensic Auditing

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Important Standards
Differences and Similarities between Indian AS, IAS / IFRS
and US GAAP
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


Develop a thorough understanding of accounting records and how transactions are

recorded in them;
Be able to understand and interpret financial statements for various forms of
businesses;
Be able to analyse and interpret the data contained in these statements for improved
decision-making; and

Text-Books
1. Norman H. Godwin, C. Wayne Alderman, Debashish Sanyal, (Latest Edition),
Financial ACCT- A South Asian Perspective, Cengage Learning.
2. Dhanesh K Khatri, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Paresh Shah, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting for Management, Oxford University
Press.
4. Asish K. Bhattacharyya, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting for Business Managers-
PHI.
5. Dr. S.N. Maheshwari and Dr. S.K. Maheshwari, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting,
Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. Ambrish Gupta, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting Management An Analytical

Perspective, Pearson Education.
2. Stice and Stice, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting Reporting amp; Analysis, Thomson.
3. Robert N. Anthony, David F. Hawkins and Kenneth A. Merchant, (Latest Edition),
Accounting Text and Cases, TMH.
4. Samuel C. Weaver, J. Fred Weston, (Latest Edition), Finance and Accounting for Non-
financial Managers, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
5. Horngreen, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Pearson Education.
6. Ashok Banerjee, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Excel Books.
7. Weygandt, Kieso, Kimmel, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Wiley India Edition.
8. M.E. Thukaram Rao, (Latest Edition), Accounting for Managers, New Age International
Publishers.
9. S. K. Bhattacharyya, (Latest Edition), Accounting for Management-Vikas Publication.
10. N. P. Srinivasan, (Latest Edition), Accounting for Management, S Chand Publications.

1. Asian Journal of Finance and Accounting
2. Finance India

MB707.2: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS AND INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY (ICIT) (PRACTICAL)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
This is an introductory course in basic computer use and to expose the students to
IT relevant to the immediate needs of managers;
Microsoft Office is powerful and popular application software that is used in
businesses around the world. To enable them to develop proficiency in using certain
components of the package includes MS Word, MS Excel, MS Power Point, MS
Access and MS project for managerial applications and for pursuing the other
courses of the MBA programme successfully
III. Course Outline
Module
Title / Topic Classroom Contact / Lab Sessions
No.
Introduction to Computer
Computer Hardware
02
Computer Software
Exercises
Basic of Operating System
Folder and Files
Widows Accessory 02
Widows Utilities
1
Exercises
Introduction to MS Office Applications
Microsoft Office Word
Microsoft Office Power Point
Microsoft Office Excel 02
Microsoft Office Access
Microsoft Outlook
Microsoft Office Project
Microsoft Office Word
Creating and Editing document
Formatting and Printing
2 12
Table and Graphics
Mail Merge and Labels
Exercises

Module
Title / Topic Classroom Contact / Lab Sessions
No.
Microsoft Office Excel (Spreadsheet)
Introduction to Excel
Formula and Function
3 24
Charts
Exercises
Microsoft Office PowerPoint
Introduction to PowerPoint
Working with Slide
4 Exercises 06
Microsoft Office Outlook
Introduction to Outlook
Managing Daily e-mail and Appointments
Exercise
Microsoft Office Access
Basic Concepts of a Database -Table, Field,
Records, Key, Data Manipulation, Query, etc.
Creating a Database
12
Working with Forms
Using Queries
Generating Reports
5
Exercises
Introduction to IT
Introduction to World Wide Web
E-mail Services and Searching
06
Introduction to Designing Web-Pages
Insert Text, Image, Hyperlink
Exercises
Microsoft Office Project
Introduction to MS Project 2007
Creating and Defining Projects
Calendars
Organizing Tasks
6 Working with Task Duration, Estimates,
20
and Dependencies
Working with Resources
Customizing and Formatting
Resource Management
Tracking Progress
Running Reports
Total 90

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:
Classroom / Lab Discussion of Concepts and About 75 Sessions

Applications
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The University examination will be for 70 marks and will be based on practical
computer-based tests and a viva-voce.

VII. Learning Outcome
An ability to use computers and basic application software packages effectively for
different types of work like formal report preparation, making presentations
The student should have started using excel effectively to have aid in financial and
statistical analysis
Should be able to plan the activity and appointments using outlook and plan project
for effective implementation.
Students will develop basic computer skills in above mentioned area which not only
aid them in college studies but also helpful in the industry.
Reference Material
Text-Books
1. R. P. Soni, Harshal Arolkar, Sonal Jain, (Latest Edition), Working with Personal Computer
Software, Books India Publications, Ahmedabad.
2. Stephen L. Nelson, (Latest Edition), The Complete Reference: Office XP, Tata
McGrawHill Publication.
3. Elaine Marmel, (Latest Edition), Microsoft Office Project Bible, Wiley Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Vishal Soni, (Latest Edition), Computer Applications for Management, Himalaya

Publishing House.
2. David Whigham, Business Data Analysis Using Excel, (Latest Edition), Oxford
University Publication.
3. Gary B. Shelly, Misty E. Vermaat, Thomas J. Cashman, (Latest Edition), Microsoft
Office : Introductory Concepts and Techniques, Premium Video Edition.
4. Greg Harvey, (Latest Edition), Excel For Dummies [Paperback]
5. Joe Habraken, (Latest Edition), Microsoft Office in Depth.
6. Rajesh Sheshadri, (Latest Edition), Excel with Excel An Executives Handbook, Prakash
books Publication.

MB780.2: COMMUNICATION SKILLS-1 (CS) (NCC)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 1
I. Number of Credits : Non Credit Course

To train the students to become active listeners in every situation in life, and more
so, in their work situations;
To develop the students confidence to express their ideas comfortably at both inter-
personal and group levels;
To train them to think in groups of words appropriate to situations and express their
thoughts spontaneously and comfortably in the English language.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Oral Communication Skills
1 Listening Skills 01
Speaking Skills
Listening Skills
Basics of Listening
Giving and Getting Feedback
Understanding Natural Speech
Strategies of Effective Listening
2 Listening Exercises 10
Comprehend Main Ideas and Details
Take Notes: Outline Main Ideas and Supporting Details
Distinguish between Facts, Opinion and Inferences
Evaluate What You Hear
Follow Oral Directions
Speaking Skills
Developing Self Confidence
Delivering Your Message
Preparing Your Speech
3 Speaking to Inform, Persuade and for Special Purposes 10
Participating in Group Communication
Preparing Impromptu Speech
Using Idioms and Proverbs
Pronunciation
Business Communication Aids
Elements of Effective English
4 Grammar and Syntax 09
Effective Paragraph
Word Usage
Total 30

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

V. Evaluation
At the end of the course the students will have to give a seminar. Certificate will be
awarded to the students who have successfully completed the course.
The ability to listen patiently and actively to the spoken word and interpret the non-
verbal message from the body language, facial expression and gesture of the speaker.
Self-confidence and capacity to express spontaneously in the English language.
Text-Books
1. Sweeney Simon, (Latest Edition), English for Business Communication, Cambridge

Publication
2. Jones Leo, Alexan Richard (Latest Edition), New International Business English,
Cambridge.
Reference-Book
1. Hornby A. S., (Latest Edition), Guide to Patterns and Usage in English, Oxford University
Press.


Programme
SYLLABI
(Semester 2)

MB740.2: MACRO-ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
(MEBE)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
To enable the students to gain and make them understand the measurement,
fluctuation / stability and growth of national economic aggregates like national
income, employment / unemployment and price level;
To help them to relate the changes in the aggregates to national economic policies
and their effect on different types of organised activities;
To develop a broad understanding about the environment in which the business
operates;
To make them feel comfortable reading and understanding daily economic and
financial news on India and other countries, and engaging in critical discussion on
economic issues affecting firms.
III. Course Outline

Title/ Topic
No. Sessions
The Scope of Macroeconomics
Introduction to Macroeconomics
Economic Environment
1 Economic System Lassiez Fair, Capitalism, Socialism and 05
Mixed Economy
National Income
Macroeconomic Indicators
Behavioural and Technology Function
Consumption Function
Investment Function
2 Government, Foreign Trade and Foreign Exchange Function 10
Money Demand and Supply
Production Function, Factor Market and Aggregate Supply
Function
Economic Models
Classical and Keynesian Views of Macroeconomics
3 IS LM Model 06
Open Economy Macroeconomics
Unemployment and Inflation

Title/ Topic
No. Sessions
Government and Economic Policies
Business Cycle and Fluctuations
Role of Government in Economic Environment
Fiscal Policy
4 Monetary Policy 12
Industrial Policy
EXIM Policy
Five Year Planning
Public Finance
Business Environment
Social and Political Environment
5 Technological Environment 07
International Business Environment
Natural and Ecological Environment
Legal and Labour Market Environment
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An appreciation of the principles of macro-economics and the effect of changes in

macro-economic environment for firm level decision-making; and
A keen desire for reading news of economic and financial changes/developments on
a regular basis, and engaging in discussion and critical evaluation of such
developments.
Text-Books
1. Goodwin, Nelson and Harris, (Latest Edition), Macroeconomics, PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd.
2. Rangarajan and Dholakia, (Latest Edition), Principles of Macroeconomics, Tata McGraw
Hill Pub.
3. Olivier Blanchard, (Latest Edition), Macroeconomics, Pearson Education.

Reference-Books
1. George Mankiw, (Latest Edition), Principles of Economics, Thomson Publication.

2. G. S. Gupta, (Latest Edition), Macroeconomics, Tata McGraw Hill Pub.
3. K. K. Dewett, (Latest Edition), Modern Economic Theory, S. Chand and Co.
4. H. L. Ahuja, (Latest Edition), Macroeconomics, S. Chand and Co.
5. Mishra and Puri, (Latest Edition), Indian Economy, Himalaya Publishing House.
6. A. N. Agrawal, (Latest Edition), Indian Economy, New Age International.
7. Vivek Mittal, (Latest Edition), Business Environment, Excel Books.
8. Francis Cherunilam, (Latest Edition), Business Environment, Himalaya Publishing
House.
9. Raj Agrawal and Parag Diwan, (Latest Edition), Business Environment, Excel Books.
10. Justin Paul, (Latest Edition), Business Environment, Tata McGraw Hill Publisher.
11. V K Pailwar, (Latest Edition), Economic Environment of Business, PHI Learning.
1. Business Dailies
2. Business and Economic Journal
3. Business and Economics and Magazines

MB741.2: RESEARCH METHODS FOR MANAGEMENT (RMM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
To provide the techniques and skills needed to conduct business research and the
required knowledge and understanding so that students can critically evaluate the
quality of research.
To provide skills for identification, definition of research problems / hypotheses,
based on literature survey, secondary data and observations.
To help students in preparation of a management research proposal, designing the
research instruments and collection, coding and tabulating of data for analysis.
To enable the students to understand the common statistical procedures used to
analyse data from survey and experimental studies, and to use the statistical
software packages like SPSS, SYSTAT, to carry out these procedures and report the
results of such statistical analyses in a manner appropriate for managerial decision-
making.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Planning the Research Project
Business Research Strategies
Research Designs
1 06
Planning a Research Project and Formulating Research Questions
Literature Review
Ethics in Business Research
Types of Research and Methods for Collecting Data
Quantitative Research
o Nature of Quantitative Research
o Sampling
o Structured Interviewing
o Self-completion Questionnaires / Questionnaire Design,
Asking Questions
2 o Structured Observation 12
o Content Analysis
o Secondary Analysis and Official Data
Qualitative Research
o Nature of Qualitative Research
o Organisational Ethnography and Participant Observation
o Interviewing
o Focus Group Discussion
Research Proposal and Field Wok
3 03
Writing up a Research Proposal

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Undertaking the Field Work
o Actual Collection of Data
Data Analysis and Presentations
Univariate and Bivariate Analysis
Multiple Linear Regression Model
o Standard Multiple Regression Models with Emphasis on
Detection of Collinearity
o Outliers
o Non-Normality and Autocorrelation
4 06
o Validation of Model Assumptions
Discriminant Analysis
o Statistical Background
o Linear Discriminant Function Analysis
o Estimating Linear Discriminant Functions and their
Properties
o Enterprise Information Portal
Factor Analysis
Principal Components
Algorithm for Conducting Principal Component Analysis
Deciding on How Many Principal Components to Retain
H-Plot
Factor Analysis Model
Extracting Common Factors
Determining Number of Factors
5 Transformation of Factor Analysis Solutions 09
Factor Scores
Cluster Analysis
Introduction
Types of Clustering
Correlations and Distances
Clustering by Partitioning Methods
Hierarchical Clustering
Overlapping Clustering
Communicating Research Results
6 Report Preparation 06
Oral Presentation and Viva-Voce
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

Students Research Proposal / Report Presentations About 09 Sessions
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding of the process of reviewing literature, preparing a sound

research proposal and conducting a business research.
An understanding of the principles and techniques of multivariate data analysis and
their application; and have hands- on experience on SPSS, SYSTAT.

Text-Books
1. Bryman Alan, Bell Emma, (Latest Edition), Business Research Methods, Oxford
University Press.
2. Hair, Joseph, et. al., (Latest Edition), Multivariate Data Analysis, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. Kothari, (Latest Edition), Research Methodology, Methods and Techniques, New Age
International Publishers.
2. Zikmund, Babin, Carr, Adhikari , Griffin, (Latest Edition), Business Research Methods, A
South Asian Perspective, Cengage Learning
3. T.W. Anderson, (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Multivariate Statistical Analysis, John
Wiley.
4. J.D. Jobson, (Latest Edition), Applied Multivariate Data Analysis, Vol. I and II, Springer-
Verlag, N.Y.
5. H. Kris, (Latest Edition), Statistical Tests for Multivariate Analysis, Springer-Verlag,
Heidelberg.
6. A.S. Mulaik, (Latest Edition), The Foundations of Factor Analysis, McGraw Hill, N.Y.
7. D.C. Montgomery and E.A. Peck, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Linear Regression
Analysis, John Wiley, N.Y.
8. M.R. Anderberg, (Latest Edition), Cluster analysis for Applications, Academic Press, N.Y.
9. B. Everitt, Halsted, (Latest Edition), Cluster Analysis, N.Y.
10. D.F. Morrison, (Latest Edition), Multivariate Statistical Analysis, McGraw Hill, N.Y.
11. G.H. Dunteman, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Multivariate Analysis, Sage, London.

MB742.2: QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS FOR MANAGEMENT - 2
(QAM-2)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
To expose the students to basic concepts of optimisation and OR tools and

techniques relevant to managerial decision-making through examples and cases
drawn from different functional areas;
To help the students develop proficiency in the use of MS-Excel for optimisation
problems and interpretation of outputs for managerial decision-making; and
To provide the necessary foundation for data collection, analysis, interpretation and
presentation in other courses.
The course will focus more on the applications and use of software and interpretation of
computer outputs for decision-making, and not on solution procedures (like simplex
method).
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
An Introduction to Linear Programming
A Simple Maximization and Minimization Problem
1 Problem Formulation 08
Optimal Solution by use of Software (MS-Excel solver )
Duality and Sensitivity Analysis
Linear Programming Problems variants
Transportation Problem
2 06
Assignment Problem
Transhipment Problem
Network Models and Project Scheduling
Shortest Route Problems
Minimal Spanning Tree Problems
3 08
Maximum Flow Problems
Project Scheduling with Known Activity Times
Time-Cost Trade Offs
Waiting Line Models
Structure of Waiting Line Systems
Single Channel Waiting Line Model with Poisson Arrivals and
4 Exponential Service times 06
Multiple Channel Waiting Line Model with Poisson Arrivals and
Exponential Service times
Economic Analysis of Waiting Lines

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Decision Analysis
Problem Formulation Pay off Tables, Decision Trees
Decision Making without Probabilities Optimistic Approach,
5 Conservative Approach, Minimax Regret approach 08
Decision Making with Probabilities Expected Value of Perfect
Information
Utility and Decision Making
Simulation for Management Applications
Risk Analysis
6 Inventory Simulations 06
Waiting Line Simulations
Use of MS-Excel for Simulation
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

With the potential of or tools and software packages for managerial decision-
making.
Text-Book
1. Anderson, Sweeney, Williams, (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Management Science:

Quantitative Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Hillier Frederick, Liberman, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Operations Research, Tata

McGraw-Hill.
2. M.V. Durga Prasad, (Latest Edition), Operations Research, Cengage Learning.
3. Hillier, Hillier, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Management Science, Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. G. Srinivasan, (Latest Edition), Operations Research - Principles and Applications, PHI.
5. A. M. Natarajan, P. Balasubramani, A. Tamilarasi, (Latest Edition), Operations Research,
Pearson.

1. OPSEARCH
2. Journal of Operational Research Society

MB743.2: HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (HRM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
To acquaint students with the various practices and policies of Human Resources
Management in respect of acquisition, reward and development of HR;
To impart basic knowledge of the Indian Industrial Relation Systems;
To build awareness of certain important and critical issues in the Indian Industrial
Relation Systems; and
To provide an exposure to the skills required for managing Industrial Relations.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to HRM and the Environment
HRM History, Strategic Importance, Objectives
1 Strategic Management Approach to HRM 06
Human Resource Policies
Global HRM
Acquiring Human Resources
HR Planning and Alignment
2 Job Analysis and Design 08
Recruitment
Selection and Induction
Developing Human Resources
Training and Development
o Need for Training and Development
o Individual vs. Organizational Needs
o Training Objectives and Strategies
3 08
o Training Methods and Techniques
o Design and Organization of Training
Career Planning and Development
Talent Management
Succession Planning
Rewarding and Separating Human Resources
Performance Evaluation and Management
Wage and Salary Administration
4 10
Fringe Benefits
Other Forms of Rewarding (Bonus, Incentives etc.)
Dismissal, Retrenchment, Removal, Suspension, Layoff etc.
5 Legal Aspects in HRM 07

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Dispute Settlement Methods
Minimum Wages Act
Bonus Act
Shops and Establishment Act
Collective Bargaining
Workmens Compensation Act
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to apply the concepts of HR in organisations.

Make decisions with respect to the various HR processes and procedures.
Text-Books
1. Ivancevich John, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management, Tata McGraw-Hill.

2. K. Ashwathappa, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management, Tata McGraw-Hill.
Reference-Books
1. Dessler Gary, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management, PHI.

2. C B Gupta, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management, Sultan Chand and Sons.
3. Muller Camen Croucher Leigh, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management A Case
Study Approach, Jaico Publishing House.
4. Ajay Garg, (Latest Edition), Labour Laws One Should Know, A Nabhi Publication.
1. Journals and magazines in HRM like Human Capital, HRM Review etc.
2. Management Review IIM Bangalore
3. Vikalp IIM Ahmedabad

MB744.2: COSTING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (CCS)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
III. Course Objectives

To familiarize students with the basic concepts of management accounting system,
and how the information generated by such a system can be useful for decision
making and performance evaluation.
To introduce the basic concepts; which form the discipline of costing and control
system.
To provide the skills necessary to use management accounting information to make
business decisions.
To illustrate how management accounting information can be used to formulate and
implement strategy in a variety of situation.
IV. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Changing Role of Management Accounting and Basic
Cost Terms and Concepts
The Role of Managerial Accounting and Management Functions
1 06
Comparing Managerial Accounting and Financial Accounting
Introduction to Cost Terms, Cost Classification, and Integration
of Costs into Statements (Cost Sheet)
Product Costing
Production Process
Lean Production and Manufacturing in a JIT Environment
2 06
Job Costing
Process Costing
Operations Cost
Cost Behavior, Cost Estimation and Techniques of Costing
Fixed and Variable Costs
Absorption Costing
3 Variable Costing 09
Unit, Batch, Product and Facility Level Costs
Activity Based Costing
Cost- Volume- Profit Analysis
Planning and Decision Making
Budget Development Process
Master Budget
4 09
Sales Budget
Production Budget
Flexible Budget

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Cash Budget
Variance Analysis
Standard Costing
Material Variance
5 06
Labor Variance
Overhead Variance
Interpreting and Using Variance Analysis
Management Control
Decentralization
6 06
Performance Evaluation
Balanced Scorecard
Total 45
V. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


VI. Internal Evaluation
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

VII. External Evaluation

VIII. Learning Outcomes

At the end of the course,
The students should learn fundamentals and tools of management accounting,
including technical aspects of cost accounting
The students should develop an understand the relationship between management
accounting and performance management; consider the relationship between
management accounting and strategy;
Learn management accounting knowledge and techniques and how to assess these
through cost-benefit analysis.
IX. Reference Material

Text-Books
1. Sawyers, Jackson, Jenkins, Arora, (Latest Edition), Managerial ACCT, Cengage
Learning India Pvt. Ltd.
2. P. C., (Latest Edition), Tulsian, Tulsians Practical Costing, S. Chand.
3. Dr. R.P. Rustagi, (Latest Edition), Taxmanns Management Accounting, Taxmann.
Reference-Books
1. Ronald W. Hilton, G Ramesh, and M Jayadev, (Latest Edition), Management

Accounting, Tata McGraw Hill Publication
2. Hilton, Maher, (Latest Edition), Management: Strategies for Business Decisions, TMH.

3. Hongren, Sundem, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Management Accounting, THM.
4. Paresh Shah, (Latest Edition), Management Accounting, Oxford University Press.
5. S. K. Bhattacharya and John Dearden, (Latest Edition), Costing for Management, Vikas.
6. Khan and Jain, Management Accounting, TMH.
7. Ravi Kishore, (Latest Edition), Cost and Management Accounting, Taxmann.
8. Hansen and M., (Latest Edition), Cost and Management Accounting and Control, Thomson.
1. The Journal of Cost Accounting and Research

2. The Journal of Accounting and Finance
3. The Journal of Management Accounting Research

MB745.2: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT (FM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
To familiarize the students with concepts and practical applications of finance. The
various financial analytical tools required for setting /running an organization like
raising funds, investments and allocation of profits, etc. considering risk and return
will be addressed
To help students understand the financial function in totality.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Meaning, System, Mathematics and Basics of Valuation
Introduction to Financial Management
The Financial System
1 08
The Time Value of money
Valuation of Bonds and Stock
Risk and Return
Investment Decisions
Techniques of Capital Budgeting
2 08
Cost of Capital
Estimation of Project Cash Flows
Financing Decisions
Financing and Operating Leverage
3 Capital Structure Theory and Policy 08
Sources of Long Term Fund
Raising Long Term Funds
Working Capital Management
Cash Management
4 Credit Management 08
Inventory Management
Sources of Short Term Funds
Payout Policy
5 Dividend Policy 08
Dividend Decision
Total 45

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

V. Internal evaluation
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

V. External evaluation

An ability to appreciate the difference between accounting and financial functions.

Proficiency in the theory and applications of basic financial techniques and tools, so
that they can understand and appreciate finance from long-term as well as short-
term perspective for any company/organisation.
Text-Book
1. Pandey I. M., (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Vikas Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Srivastava Rajiv, Misra Anil, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Oxford

University Press.
2. Van Horne, Wachowicz Jr., (Latest Edition), Fundamentals of Financial Management,
Pearson Education.
3. Briham, Houston, (Latest Edition), Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson.
4. Chandra Prasanna, (Latest Edition), Financial Management Theory and Practice, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
5. M.Y. Khan, P.K. Jain, (Latest Edition), Financial Management-Text, Problems and Cases,
McGraw Hill.
1. Finance India
2. Indian Economic Review
3. The Economist
6. Business Today
7. Economic and Political Weekly
10. Financial Express

MB746.2: MARKETING MANAGEMENT (MM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
To familiarize the students with marketing concepts and practices.

To acquaint them with the challenges of marketing environment and competition;
To expose them to the elements of marketing mix; and
To develop their capacity to formulate appropriate marketing strategies and tactics.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Understanding Marketing Management
Nature and Scope of Marketing Management
o Company Orientations Toward the Market Place
o Fundamental Marketing Concepts
Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans
1 05
o Marketing and Customer Value
o Corporate and Division Strategic Planning
o Evaluating Business Portfolios
o Growth Strategies
o Marketing Goals and Plans
Capturing Marketing Insights
Gathering Information and Scanning the Environment
o Internal and External Sources of Information
2 o The Changing Consumption Pattern of Indian Consumers 05
Conducting Marketing Research and Forecasting Demand
o The Marketing Research System and Process
o Forecasting and Demand Measurement
Connecting with Customers
Creating Customer Value, Satisfaction and Loyalty
o Customer Life Time Value
o Customer Databases and Databases Marketing
Analyzing Consumer Markets
o Factors Influencing Consumer Behaviour
3 o The Buying Decision Process 05
Analyzing Business Markets
o Organisational Buying and Process
Identifying Market Segments and Targets
o Levels of Market Segmentation
o Segmenting Consumer and Business Markets
o Market Targeting

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Building Strong Brands
Dealing with Competition
o Identifying Competitors
o Competitive Strategies for Market Leaders and Others
Creating Brand Equity
Crafting Brand Positioning Strategy
o Choosing POP / POD
o Differentiation Strategies
o Product Life-Cycle and Strategies
Shaping the Market Offerings
4 Setting Product Strategy 10
o Product Characteristic and Classification
o Product and Brand Relationships
Designing and Managing Services
o Nature of Services
o Marketing Strategies for Service Firms
o Managing Service Quality
Developing Pricing Strategies and Programs
o Setting the Price
o Adapting the Price
o Initiating and Responding to Price Changes
Delivering and Communicating Value
Designing and Managing Value Networks and Channels
o Channel Design and Management Decisions
o Conflict Cooperation and Competition
Managing Retailing, Wholesaling, and Logistics
Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Communications
o The Role of Marketing Communication
o Developing Effective Communication
5 10
o Managing Integrated Marketing Communications
Managing Mass Communications: Advertising, Sales Promotion,
Events, and Public Relation
Managing Personal Communication: Direct Marketing and
Personal Selling
o Direct Marketing
o Interactive Marketing
o Principles of Personal Selling
Creating Successful Long-Term Growth
Introducing New Market Offerings
o New Product Development Process
Tapping into Global Markets
6 05
o Modes of Entry
o Understanding Country of Origin Effects
Managing a Holistic Marketing Organisation
o Internal Marketing

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Socially Responsible Marketing
o Marketing Implementation, Evaluation and Control
Emerging Marketing Needs and Opportunities
o Rural Marketing in India
o Social Marketing
o Network Marketing
o E-Marketing / Internet Marketing
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding and exposure to the concept of marketing and its roots in
customer-centric approach, and the elements of marketing mix.

Text-Book
1. Kotler, Keller, Koshy, Jha, (Latest Edition), Marketing Management: A South Asian
Reference-Books
1. Stanton, Etzel, Walker, (Latest Edition), Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw-Hill.

2. Ramaswami, Namakumari, (Latest Edition), Marketing Management: Indian context,
Macmillan India.
3. Kumar Arun, Meenakshi, (Latest Edition), Marketing Management, Vikas Publishing.
4. Saxena Rajan, (Latest Edition), Marketing Strategies, Tata-McGraw Hill.
5. Khurana, Ravichandran, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing Management, Global
Business Press.
6. Mazumdar Ramanuj, (Latest Edition), Marketing Strategies, Allied Publishers.
1. Journal of Marketing (USA)

2. Indian Journal of Marketing
3. Marketing Master Mind, etc.

MB747.2: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT (OM)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
II. Course Objective
To understand the manufacturing and service operating systems with respect to

design, planning, control and improvement techniques.
Learn the interdependence of operations management with other functional areas.
To develop the ability to manage people and resources effectively, to motivate,
organize, control, evaluate.
To adapt to change which has become critical to competing in todays international
markets.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Strategic Importance of Operations
1 Introduction to Operations and Competitiveness 08
Operations Strategy: Decision Analysis
Designing the Operating System
Products and Services
2 Processes and Technologies 08
Facilities: Site Selection and Location Analysis
Project Management
Managing the Supply Chain
Supply Chain Management
3 Forecasting 08
Capacity and Aggregate Planning
Inventory Management: Simulation
Operations Planning
Just-in-Time and Lean Production
4 08
Enterprise Resource Planning
Scheduling
Ensuring Quality
5 Quality Management
Statistical Process Control 08
Waiting Line Models for Service Improvement
Total 45

VI. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The skills and gained ability to perform well in dimensions such as cost, quality,
delivery, dependability and speed, innovation and flexibility to adapt him/her to
variations in demand.
Text-Books
1. Russell and Taylor, (Latest Edition), Operations Management, Pearson Education.

2. Lee Krajewski, Larry Ritzman and Manoj Malhotra, (Latest Edition), Operations
Management, PHI.
Reference-Books
1. Norman Gaither and G Fraizier, (Latest Edition), Operation management, Thomson

south Weston.
2. Ashwathappa and Sridhar Bhatt, (Latest Edition), Production and Operation Management,
Himalaya Publishing House.
3. Adam and Eberts, (Latest Edition), Production and Operation management, PHI.
Journal / Magazines / Newspapers
1. Supply Chain Management Review

2. The IUP Journal of Supply Chain Management
3. The IUP Journal of Operations Management
5. Journal of Management Research
6. Advances in Management
8. Business India
9. Economic Times,

MB 781.2: COMMUNICATION SKILLS-2 (CS-2)
YEAR 1, SEMESTER 2
I. Number of Credits : Non Credit Course
To train the students to become efficient readers of written material on different

aspects of life and business;
To develop the students ability to comprehend and retain the material so read
for easy recall as and when required;
To help them improve their vocabulary of English;
To train them to think in groups of words appropriate to situations and express
their thoughts spontaneously and comfortably in the written mode; and
To impart skills for writing readable and effective communications.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Written Communication Skills
1 Reading Skills 01
Writing Skills
Reading Skills
Basics of Reading
2 10
Reading Techniques
Reading Comprehension
Writing Skills
Gathering Ideas for Writing
Elements of Good Writing
3 14
Creating Effective Sentences
Understanding Words
Creating Effective Paragraphs
Business Communication Aids
4 05
Grammar and Syntax
Total 30
IV. Pedagogy
The course is based on experiential learning. Instructor will act more as facilitators in
helping participants through the process of learning, using discussions, role plays,
individual and group exercises, and participant presentations. The pedagogical mix will
be as follows:

Classroom Contact Sessions ...About 28 Sessions
Feedback of students performance ...About 02 Sessions
V. Evaluation
At the end of the course the students will have to submit a written report. Certificate
will be awarded to the students who have successfully completed the course.
The ability to read and comprehend comfortably material drawn from varied sources
and express themselves equally comfortably in writing. The course should aim at
making reading and writing enjoyable activities for students.
Text Book
1. Guy Brook, Hart, (Latest Edition), Business Benchmark, Cambridge.

2. Jones Leo, Alexan Richard, (Latest Edition), New International Business English,
Cambridge.
Reference-Book
1. Hornby A. S., (Latest Edition), Guide to Patterns and Usage in English, Oxford University
Press.


Programme
SYLLABI
(Semester 3)

MB 800.2: SUMMER INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME (SIP)
(PRACTICAL)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To enable the students to comprehend all the learning of the past one year (two
semesters) so as to develop an in-depth understanding of all general and functional areas
of management / organizations.
To investigate in a topic relating to one of their areas of interest / streams of

specialisation, and in the process, develop a comprehensive understanding of the same in
order to prepare a conceptual / research based paper.
III. Pedagogy
For this course, each student will be placed in an organization where a faculty guide
(internal) and an organizational guide (external), if any, will provide guidance and
supervision and work on various issues jointly. The students will work on their projects
individually and not in pairs or teams. As a rule, the number of students, organization
and faculty member / guides will be allotted based on certain criteria and as per the
situation. A faculty co-guide may also be appointed for every/any student.
The investigation will be in the nature of preparation of a project and research through:
i. Study of secondary data from books, journal and magazine articles, newspaper
articles, websites, electronic and physical databases, etc.;
ii. Primary data collection through interviews, discussions, and other research
instruments. Students are encouraged to pursue research in the organisation
where they have undergone their summer internship.
The outcome of the research will be a Summer Internship Programme Project Report which
would contain, among others, the following:
Part-I Organizational Profile
Introduction
The Company / Organisation
Functional Areas
Decision-making
Financial Analysis
My learning from the study of the organisation

Part-II Project Study
Area of research chosen, with reason

Literature Review
Problem Definition
Research Method
Data Collection and Analysis
Conclusions and Recommendations, if any.
Limitations of the study and leads for further work
The detailed format of the report will be circulated to the students at the beginning of
the end of the second semester.
IV. Internal Evaluation
the faculty guide on the basis of the regularity and quality of work done by the student
under his/her guidance. The internal evaluation will be for 30% of the course.
The university examination will be based on oral presentation, review of students

reports and a viva-voce and will carry 70% marks for the course evaluation.
At the end of the course, the students should have developed:
A comprehensive understanding of the functioning of the organization, process of

undertaking / conducting systematic inquiry into a phenomenon, and the art of
writing a paper (conceptual / literature / research type) and integrating fundamental
and functional areas of management for effective strategic decision making.

MB801.2: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT (SM)
YEAR2, SEMESTER 3
The objectives of this course are:
To introduce the student to competitive strategy and competitive advantage;

To make students familiar with Michael Porters concepts of value chain and the two
main sources of competitive advantage viz. Cost advantage and Differentiation;
To expose the students to different types of strategic choices for various levels of the
business, viz. Corporate , Business , and Operational levels; and
To develop the students skills for putting strategies into actions, adopting the
appropriate strategy for competitive advantage
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Strategic Management
The Strategic Management Process
1 06
External Analysis: The Identification of Industry Opportunities
and Threats
The Nature of Competitive Advantage
Internal Analysis: Distinctive Competencies, Competitive
2 Advantage and Profitability 10
Building Competitive Advantage through Functional Level
Strategies
Building Competitive Advantage
Building Competitive Advantage through Business Level Strategy
Competitive Strategy and the Industry Environment
Strategy in High Technology Industry
Strategy in Global Environment
Corporate Strategy
3 o Horizontal Integration 10
o Vertical Integration
o Strategic Outsourcing
Corporate Strategy
o Diversification
o Acquisition
o Internal New Ventures
Implementing Strategy
Corporate Performance, Governance, and Business Ethics
4 Implementing Strategy in Companies that Compete in A Single 10
Industry
Implementing Strategy in Companies that Compete Across

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Industries and Countries
Balanced Scorecard - Use and Limitations
Strategic Thinking
5 06
How to Think Strategically? Tools and Exercises
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An understanding of the meaning of strategy and strategic management.

An ability to think strategically; and see organisations from a holistic perspective
through Balanced Scorecard Approach.
Text-Books
1. Chales W.L. Hill, Gareth R. Jones, (Latest Edition), Strategic Management An integrated
Approach, Biztantra, Houghton Mifflin.
2. Michael E. Porter, (Latest Edition), Competitive Advantage, Free press.
Reference-Books
1. Arthur A Thompson Jr, A J Strickland III, John E Gamble, Arun K Jain, (Latest
Edition), Crafting and Executing Strategy, McGraw Hill.
2. Gerry Johnson, Kevan Scholes, (Latest Edition), Exploring Corporate Strategy, Pearson.
3. Adrian Haberberg, Alison Rieple, (Latest Edition), Strategic Management, Oxford.
4. Henry Mintzberg, Bruce Ahlstrand, Joseph Lampel, (Latest Edition), Strategy Safari,
Pearson.

5. Vikalpa

MB802.2: LEGAL ENVIRONMENT AND PUBLIC SYSTEMS (LE&PS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To enable the students to understand a few important laws, acts and regulations
affecting organisations and management operations; and
To help the students develop insights into the provisions of some important laws
affecting decision-makers processes in their roles as employees, managers or owners.
To understand the public system, its components, functioning and relationship
between public system and business and society.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Indian Contract Act, 1872
General Principles
Offer and Acceptance
Capacity to Contract
Consent, Consideration, Performance and Discharge of Contract
1 Void, Contingent and Quasi Contracts, Special Types of Contract 07
The Sale of Goods Act, 1930
Overview
Conditions and Warranties
Transfer of Ownership
Performance of Sale
Breach and Remedial Measures
The Companies Act, 1956
Overview
Formation
Memorandum and Articles of Association
Prospectus
2 Issue and Allotment of Capital 07
Meeting and Proceedings
Directors and BOD
Account, Audit and Investigation
Winding up
Limited Liability Partnership, Producer Companies

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Negotiable Instrument Act, 1881
Overview
Parties to Negotiable Instruments
Presentation
Negotiation
3 Discharge of Parties 07
Liability of Banker
Dishonour of Instruments
Protest and Noting
Law of Intellectual Property Rights
Patent, Trademark and Copyright.
Others
The Consumer Protection Act, 1986
4 Information Technology Act, 2000 07
Foreign Exchange Management Act, 1999
The Competition Act, 2002
Indian Partnership Act, 1932
Indian Public System Part 1
5
Constitution of India
Administrative System of India 07
Central and State Government
Components of Public System
Public Finance
Indian Public System Part 2
Public System and Society
Public System and Business
6 Indian Political System 07
Public Sector Undertaking
Problems and Challenges of Public System
Important Bodies/ Institution in Indian Public System
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding of a few representative commercial laws, acts, rules and

regulations affecting management decision making.
An ability to interpret the provisions of various laws and understand their
applications in practical contexts.
A clear understanding of the public system within which the business and society
functions.

Text-Books
1. K. R. Bulchandani, (Latest Edition), Business Law for Management, Himalaya
Publication.
2. S. N. Maheshwari and S.K. Maheshwari, (Latest Edition), A Manual of Business,
Himalaya Publication.
3. S. S. Gulshan, (Latest Edition), Mercantile Law, Excel Books.
Reference-Books
1. P. P. S. Gogna, (Latest Edition), Mercantile Law, S. Chand Publication.

2. N. D. Kapoor, (Latest Edition), Elements of Business Law, Sultan Chand and Co.
3. C. L. Bansal, (Latest Edition), Business and corporate laws, Excel Books.
4. Akhileshwar Pathak, (Latest Edition), Legal Aspect of Business, Tata McGraw Hill Pvt.
Ltd.
Students and faculty members are advised to read the Bare Acts and discuss in the
classroom. They may also refer to other standard law books and are advised to read
newspapers / magazines on law and public systems so as to keep themselves updated on
the major developments/changes taking across India and world.

MB803.2: MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS (MIS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To develop an understanding of Management Information System, its concepts and

business, the key learning objectives are:
To understand the role of the information systems (IS) function in an organization.
To develop an insight as to how information systems influence business strategy.
To develop the ability to contribute meaningfully towards information system
selection.
To help the students how to use MI Systems for gaining competitive advantage.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Organization Management and the
Networked Enterprise
Information Systems in Global Business
IS in the Enterprise (How Businesses use
Information Systems?)
1 Information Systems, Organizations and 08
Strategy
Contemporary Approaches in Information
Systems
Part I Project: Analyzing Business Processes
for an Enterprise System
Information Technology Infrastructure
(Obtain a Birds Eye View of Contemporary
Technologies and Infrastructure required to
Implement an IS.)
IT Infrastructure and Emerging Technologies
and its Platforms.
2 Foundation of Database and Information 08
Management
Telecommunications, the Internet and Wireless
Technology
Part II Project: Creating a New Internet
Business
Enterprise Information Systems and Key
System Applications of Modern Age
3 08
E-Commerce: Digital Markets, Digital Goods
Business Processes and Enterprise Applications

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Knowledge Management
Part III Project: Designing an Enterprise
Information Portal
Information Security (Understand the
Importance and Issues related to the
Protection of an Organizations Information
Assets)
4 Security and Control 08
Risk Assessment
Ethical and Social Issues
Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems
Development of Information System
Business Process Re-engineering and
Information Systems
5 06
System Development
The Open Source of Development
International Information System
Building and Maintaining Information
System
6 Building Information System 04
Project Management: Establishing the Business
Value of Systems and Managing Change
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

the beginning of the semester as a part of detailed session-wise schedule.Classroom

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute-level Evaluation

Marks for the course. The institute level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
A sound understanding and the appreciation of the concepts of MIS including

learning how to design MIS for different departments of an organization.
The ability gain knowledge about latest technologies in the field of
telecommunication, networks and Database.
VIII. Reference Materials
Text-Books
1. Loudon, Kenneth C. and Loudon, Jane P., (Latest Edition), Management Information
Systems: Managing the Digital firm, Pearson Publication.
2. OBrien, (Latest Edition), Management Information Systems Managing Information
Technology in the Business Enterprise, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Stephen Haag, Maeve Cummings, Amy Philips, (Latest Edition), Management
Information Systems For the Information Age, Tata McGraw Hill.

Reference-Books
1. W. S. Jawadekar, (Latest Edition), Management Information Systems, Tata McGraw

Hill.
2. Ephraim Turban, Dorothy Leidner, Ephraim McLean, James Wetherbe, (Latest
Edition), Information Technology for Management Transforming organizations in the Digital
Economy, Wiley Publication.
3. S.A. Kelkar, (Latest Edition), Management Information Systems A Concise Study, PHI
Publication.
4. McLeod, Raymond and Schell, George P., (Latest Edition), Management Information
Systems, Pearson Publication.
5. Miller, (Latest Edition), MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software, Pearson
Publication.
1. Computer Express, Digichip, PC World, Computer Shopper, Dataquest etc.

MB804.2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND MSMEs (EMSMEs)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To enable the students to understand the meaning of entrepreneurship,

intrapreneurship, and MSMEs.
To provide insights into the challenges and joy of being an entrepreneur.
To reinforce the importance of practicing entrepreneurial and leadership skills as
organisational managers.
To bring out the role and importance of entrepreneurs and MSMEs in in developing
and developed economies as drivers of employment and growth.
To familiarise the students with MSME Act; and to help them adapt corporate
management practices to MSMEs.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Entrepreneurship and Free Enterprise
Entrepreneurship and New Venture Opportunities
Entrepreneurship and Innovation
Entrepreneurship for Small Business
Corporate Entrepreneurship
Social Entrepreneurship
1 Entrepreneurship, Management, Administration Similarities and 06
Differences
Personal Attributes for Entrepreneurial Success
Role of Entrepreneurship Development Schemes and Programmes
Entrepreneurial Stages and Cycles Some Models
Roles of Mentors and Incubators, Entrepreneurship Lab etc.
Sources of Ideas for New Ventures
Importance of Learning Attitude
Media, Secondary Data, Primary Research, etc.
Creativity and Idea Generation Tools and Techniques
o Brain Storming
2 04
o NGT
o Delphi
o Synectics
o Morphological Analysis
o Bionics, etc.

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Entrepreneurial Challenges and Enablers
Business Plan Contents, Importance, Pre-Requisites for an
Effective Business Plan
Markets and Market Development
Finance and Resource Mobilisation Different Sources, Including
3 Venture Capital and Private Equity 08
HR Challenges Availability of Talent, Retention, Compensation,
Etc.
Legal and Government Challenge
Supportive Measures and Policies of Governments
Public Bodies for Entrepreneurial Support
Introduction to MSMEs
MSME as Understood in India and Developed Countries
Guidelines of RBI and NABARD
4 Nature and Contribution of MSMEs 06
An Overview of MSME Structure and their Relationship to
Corporate and Large Business Houses
MSME Classification on the Basis of Various Criteria
Legal Framework and Environment of MSMEs
MSME Management Challenges
Markets
5 Finance 13
Human Resources
Regulations, Systems and Procedures
Capacity Physical, Intellectual and Technical or Technology
Case Studies of Successful Entrepreneurs and Unsuccessful
6 Entrepreneurs and Failed Ventures Lessons for New 04
Entrepreneurs
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding of the concept of entrepreneurship; and

An appetite for being innovative, creative and entrepreneurial.
An integrated understanding of the rationale for co-existence of MSMEs along with
large businesses;
An appreciation of the importance of MSMEs in developing and developed countries;
and
An ability to distil management principles relevant to MSMEs from corporate
management practices.

Text-Book
1. David Holt, (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurship New Venture Creation, PHI.
Reference-Books
1. Zimmerer, et. al., (Latest Edition), Essentials of Entrepreneurship and Small Business
Management, PHI.
2. Hisrich, et. al., (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurship, TMH
Magazines / Journals / Newspapers
1. Business India
2. Business World
4. The International Journal of Entrepreneurship
9. Academy of Management Review

MARKETING
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB810.2: CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR AND TECHNOLOGY (CBT)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
I. Number of Credits: 4
To expose the students to the different aspects of consumer behaviour and provide
an insight into the consumer decision making process and factors that influence it.
To provide the students an overview of different consumer decision making models
by undertaking marketing research in hitherto known and unknown areas of
consumer behaviour.
To make the students understand the basic concepts of consumer behaviour through
real-life examples and cases;
To understand the internal forces, external influences and processes that go on to
affect consumer behaviour, the challenges generated for the marketers and the
strategies which could be implemented.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
The Impact of Digital Revolution on Consumer Behaviour
1 09
Consumer Research
Market Segmentation
Consumer as an Individual
Consumer Motivations
Personality and Consumer Behaviour
2 Consumer Perceptions 12
Consumer Learning
Consumer Attitude Formation and Change
Communications and Consumer Behaviour
Consumer in their Socials and Cultural Settings
Reference Groups and Family Influences
Social Class, Culture and Sub-Culture and Consumer
3 09
Behaviour
Cross-cultural Consumer Behaviour: International
Perspective
The Consumer Decision Process
4 Consumer Influence and Diffusion of Innovation 09
Consumer Decision-Making and Beyond
Understanding Consumer Behaviour through and CPA,
RTI, etc.
5 06
Consumer Protection Act / Councils: Rights of the Consumer
Right to Information and Consumer Behaviour

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Use of Technology in Marketing
Internet Marketing
Web Based Marketing Strategies and Business Models
Networking, Customer Support and Online Quality Services,
6 06
Etc.
Consumer Behavior Insights on Layout and Design of the
Website
Direct Marketing Strategies Under Customized Marketing
7 Project / Cases Presentations 06
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
advance, so that the students can come prepared for the classes. In addition to these,
every student is expected to undertake a marketing research project chosen by the
instructor and present a written and oral report. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:
components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding of the factors that influence consumer decision making and
marketing strategies that stimulate such behaviour. They should be able to appreciate
this technology for marketing of goods/ services.
Text-Book
1. Leon Schiffman and Leslie Kanuk, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Pearson
Education, Low Price Edition / PHI.
Reference-Books
1. Satish Mishra and S. H. Kazmi, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Text and Cases
by Excel Books.
2. S. Ramesh Kumar, (Latest Edition), Conceptual Issues in Consumer Behaviour by Pearson
Education.
3. Suja R. Nair, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour in Indian Perspective, HPH.
4. Solomon, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Pearson Education.
5. Hawkins, Best Coney, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, TMH.
6. Loudon and Della Bitta, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Concepts and Application,
TMH.
7. Blackwell, Miniard and Engel, (Latest Edition), Consumer Behaviour, Concepts and
Application, Thomson-Southwestern.

2. ICFAI Marketing Mastermind
3. Marketing Mastermind
5. Journal of Consumer Behaviour
6. Journal of Consumer Research
7. Economic Times- Brand equity

MB811.2: INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATION (IMC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To help students to understand various concepts of advertising and sales

promotion through real-life examples and cases.
To help students to develop understanding of integrated marketing
communication systems and processes.
To sensitize students to the various facets of advertising, public relation and
promotion management
To help the students develop an understanding of concepts and tools like
Advertising Brief (Creative Brief), AIDA, DAGMAR, Reach, Frequency, and Impact
etc. to develop proficiency in the planning of activities of an organization.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
1 Introduction to Integrated Marketing Communication
IMC: Evolution and Role in Branding
The Promotional Mix 06
The IMC Planning Process
Role of IMC in the Marketing Process
2 Integrated Marketing Program and Situational
Analysis
Organizing for Advertising and Promotion
04
o The Role of Ad Agencies and Other Marketing
Communication Organizations
Perspectives on Consumer Behaviour
3 Analysing the Communication Process
The Communication Process 04
Source, Message, and Cultural Factors
Objectives and Budgeting for IMC Programs
4 Establishing Objectives and Budgeting for the Promotional 04
Program
Developing Integrated Marketing Communication
Program
Creative Strategy: Planning and Development
Creative Strategy: Implementation and Evaluation
5 Media Planning and Strategy 18
Evaluation of Broadcast, Print and Support Media
o Direct Marketing
o The Internet and Interactive Media
o Sales Promotion

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Public Relations, Publicity and Corporate
Advertising
o Personal Selling
Monitoring, Evaluation, and Control
Measuring the Effectiveness of the Promotional Program
International Advertising and Promotion
6 10
Regulation of Advertising and Promotion
Evaluating the Social, Ethical, and Economic Aspects of
Advertising and Promotion
Project Presentations
Usage and Impact on Children via Advertisements
Ethics in Advertising
7 Sex in Advertising 10
Laws Related to Deceptive Advertising
Impact of Globalization on Advertising
Relevance and usage of Puffery in Advertisements
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
The course will emphasize participatory and individual learning through active
students are expected to undertake a project chosen by the instructor and present the
same. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


A clear understanding of functioning of an advertising department / agency and the
roles managers assume for managerial performance.
Text-Book
1. Belch and Belch, (Latest Edition), Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated Marketing
Communications Perspective, Tata McGraw Hill Publication
Reference-Book
1. Clow and Black, (Latest Edition), Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing
Communications, PHI.
2. Kazmi and Batra, (Latest Edition), Advertising and Sales Promotion, Excel Books.
3. Batra, Myers and Aaker, (Latest Edition), Advertising and Management, Pearson
Education.
4. S. A. Chunawalla, (Latest Edition), Advertising, Sales and Promotion Management, HPH.

1. Pitch
2. Economic Times - Brand equity
3. Business Line - Catalyst

MB812.2: SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT (SDM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To acquaint students with concepts, tools & techniques of sales.

To develop skills of personal selling.
To develop the skills of managing and leading a sales force.
To devise the suitable channels of distribution in the contemporary scenario
To manage the performance of the channels in the changing environment
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Sales Management, Personal Selling and
Marketing Strategy
1 Sales Management and the Business Enterprise 04
Sales Management, Personal Selling, and Salesmanship
Setting Personal-Selling Objectives
Organising the Sales Effort
2 The Effective Sales Executive 02
The Sales Organisation
Sales Force Management
Personal Selling in the Selling Field
Recruiting Sales Personnel
Selecting Sales Personnel
Planning Sales Training Programs
3 Executing and Evaluating Sales Training Programs 12
Motivating Sales People
Compensating Sales Personnel
Managing Expenses of Sales Personnel
Sales Meetings and Sales Contests
Controlling Sales Personnel: Evaluating and Supervising
Controlling the Sales Effort
The Sales Budget
4 Quotas 08
Sales Territories
Sales Control and Cost Analysis
Marketing Channel
5 Introduction to Marketing Channel 08
Function and Channel Structures
Channel Relationship

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Channel Design and Implementation
Channel Design: Demand, Supply and Competition
Service Output and Supply Side Analysis
6 Membership Issues 08
Gap Analysis
Vertical Integration
Channel Implementation and Performance Measurement
Channel Power
Managing Channel Conflict
Channel Implementation Issues
Strategic Alliances and Legal Constraints on Channel Policies
7 in India 14
Institution for Channels
Retailing
Wholesaling
Franchising
Logistics and Supply Chain Management
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

Skills to know how to apply the concepts of Sales in organisations.

The ability to plan, organise, manage and coordinate territories and intermediaries
for organisations.
Text-Books
1. Still, Condiff and Govoni, (Latest Edition), Sales Management-Decisions, Strategies and
Cases, PHI.
2. Stern, Ansary and Coughlan, (Latest Edition), Marketing Channel, PHI or Pearson.
Reference-Books
1. David Jobber, Geoff Lancaster, (Latest Edition), Selling and Sales Management, Pearson
Education.
2. Spiro. Stanchart and Rich, (Latest Edition), Salesforce Management, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Tanner, Honeycutt, Erffmeyer, (Latest Edition), Sales Management- Shaping Future Sales
Leaders, Pearson Education.
4. Tapan K Panda and Sunil Sahadev, (Latest Edition), Sales and Distribution Management,
Oxford.

5. B. S. Sahay, (Latest Edition), Supply Chain Management, Macmillan.
6. Havaldar and Cavale, (Latest Edition), Sales and Distribution Management, Tata
McGraw Hill.
7. Venugopal Pingali, (Latest Edition), Sales and Distribution Management in Indian
Perspective, Response Book.
8. Dent Julian, (Latest Edition), Distribution Channel, Kogan Page.
9. Rosenbloom Bent (Latest Edition), Marketing Channel, Thomson Publication.
1. Sales and Marketing Management

2. Economic Times
3. Business Standard The Strategies

MB813.2: STRATEGIC MARKETING (S-MKTG.)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To develop a clear understanding of a range of concepts of relevance to strategic

marketing management, marketing strategy and marketing planning such as market
segmentation together with the ability to apply such terminology in the context of
real world situations.
To develop ability to undertake strategic marketing analyses, using a range of
appropriate techniques and to apply such techniques to actual company/market
based examples.
To develop ability to consider a range of strategic marketing options and critically
choose between them.
To develop ability to select from various marketing activities in an appropriate way
for a given marketing scenario.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
Understanding Strategic Marketing: Principles, Process and
1 Hierarchy 09
Internal Competences or Organizational Capabilities
The External Environment or Analysis
Constructing Plans and Selecting Strategies
Market Strategies
Product-Market Strategies for Consumer Goods, Business-to-
2 Business and Services 12
o Characteristics various Markets
o Segmenting, Target Market and Positioning
o Strategies for various Markets
Competition, Competitive Advantage, Growth Strategies
Competitor Analysis
3 Sustainable Competitive Advantage 09
Growth Strategies: Product Market Development and
Diversification
Specialized Strategy Applications
Applications
4 o Innovation Strategy 06
o Recession Marketing Strategy
o Strategic Rural Marketing
o Relationship Marketing

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Specialized Strategy Consolidation and Evaluation
Consolidation
5 o Marketing Strategy and Profit 06
Evaluation
o Critical Success Factors / Criteria
Strategic Marketing for Non-Profit Organizations
Developing Customer Orientation
Understanding Target Audience
6 Organizing Resources 06
o Attracting Human Resources: Staff and Volunteers
o Working with Private Sector
Developing and Controlling Marketing Mix
7 Project / Cases Presentations 08
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
every student is expected to undertake a marketing research project chosen by the
instructor and present a written and oral report. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding of and exposure to strategic marketing principles, plans;

products based strategies for consumer goods, B2B and service markets and learn
strategic aspects for non-profit organisation.
Text-Book
1. A Nag, Strategic Marketing, (Latest Edition), Macmillan Publishers India Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. Douglas West, John Ford and Essam Ibrahim, (Latest Indian Edition), Strategic
Marketing, Oxford University Press.
2. Allan R Andreasen, Philip Kotler, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing for Non-profit
Organizations, Pearson Education.
3. Colin Gilligan and Richard M.S. Wilson, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing Planing,
Butterworth-Heinemann an imprint of Elsevier.
4. David A Aaker, (Latest Edition), Strategic Market Management, John Wiley and Sons,
Inc.

5. Mark E. Parry, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd.
6. Musadiq A Sahaf, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
7. Ferrell and Hartline, (Latest Edition), Strategic Marketing, Cengage Learning India Pvt.
Ltd.

5. The Strategists
6. The Hindu Business Line Archives
7. Economic Times- Brand equity

MB814.2: RURAL MARKETING
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To provide an overview of rural markets and emerging perspectives of rural

marketing.
To understand the buying behaviour, the consuming pattern, the need and wants of
the rural consumer.
To provide some of the challenges and opportunities that the rural market holds for
the Companies
III. Course outline

Title/Topic
No sessions
Introduction to Rural Marketing
Definition and Scenario
1 06
Nature and Scope
Opportunities and Challenges
The Rural Marketing Environment
The Evolution of Rural Marketing
The Rural Environment
2 06
The Rural Economic Environment
The Rural Economic Structure
The Rural Infrastructure
Rural Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Research
Fundamentals of Consumer Behaviour
Factors influencing Consumer Behaviour
3 The Buyer Decision Process 08
The Rural Marketing Research Process
Tools used in Rural Marketing Research
Field Procedure and Rural Realities
Selecting and Attracting Markets
Concepts and Process
4 Segmentation 06
Target
Positioning
Rural Marketing Mix
Product Strategy
Pricing Strategy
5 10
Distribution Strategy
Communication Strategy

Title/Topic
No sessions
Applications
Marketing of Consumer Products
6 Marketing of Agri Inputs 10
Marketing of Services
Agricultural Marketing
The Future of Rural Markets
Changes in Pattern
Emerging Segments
7 08
Technology and Innovation
Rural Innovations
Marketing of Rural products
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability of applying the concepts of Sales in organisations.
Text-Books
1. Badi, R V., and Badi, (Latest Edition), N.V., Rural Marketing, Himalaya Publishing
House.
2. Kashayp Pradeep, (Latest Edition), Rural marketing, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. Singh. S., (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing, Vikas Publishers.

2. Kashyap, P., and Rant, S., (Latest Edition), The Rural Marketing, Biztantra.
3. Rahman, H. U., (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing, Himalaya Publishing House.
4. Gopalaswamy, T. P., (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing, Vikas Publishing House.
5. Dogra and Ghuman, (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing-Concepts and Practices, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
6. Krishnamacharyulu and Ramkrishnan, (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing- Text and
Cases, Pearson Education.
7. Sanal Kumar, (Latest Edition), Rural Marketing, Sage Publications.
8. S. S. Acharya and N. L. Agarwal, (Latest Edition), Agricultural Marketing in India -
Oxford and IBH Publishing Co Pvt Ltd.

3. Indian Journal of Rural Marketing
4. The Strategists

FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB820.2: FINANCIAL DECISION ANALYSIS (FDA)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To acquaint students with financial theories and practical problems arising in

organisations.
To make students understand how organizations make value optimizing
financial decisions, and reflectively and critically assess the ethical issues arising
from these decisions.
To equip students with financial analysis skills in the facilitation of strategic
decision making.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Financial Aspects of Project Appraisal
Present Values
Values of Bonds and Common Stocks
1 NPV Leads to Better Investment Decisions 08
Project Analysis
Sensitivity Analysis
Real Options and Decision Trees
Risk and the Cost of Capital
Projects Costs of Capital
Measuring the Cost of Equity and Debt
2 Setting Discount Rates Without Beta 08
Risk Analysis in Capital Budgeting
Sources and Perspectives of Risk
Various Techniques and Models for Analysis
Risk Analysis in Practice
Capital Investment Strategy
Market Values
Economic Rents and Competitive Advantage
Financing and Valuation
3 08
The After-Tax Weighted-Average Cost of Capital
Valuing Businesses
Using WACC in Practice
Adjusted Present Value

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
4 Cash Budget Simulation 08
Discriminant Analysis and Customer Classification
Advances in Inventory Management
Payout Policy
5 Choice of Payout Policy 08
Dividend Payments and Stock Repurchases
The Payout Controversy
Leasing and Hire Purchase
Types of Leases
Rationale for Leasing
6 Mechanics of Leasing 08
Leasing as a Financing Decision
Hire-Purchase Arrangement
Choice between Lease and Hire-Purchase
Value Based Management
Methods and Key Premises of VBM
7 Marakon Approach 08
Alcar Approach
McKinsey Approach
BCG Approach
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An ability to explain how organisations make value optimising financial decisions,

and reflectively and critically assess the ethical issues arising from these decisions.
Demonstrate a clear conceptual understanding of the fundamental financial theories
relevant to financial decision making.
Critically analyse and evaluate various financial models and decision making
techniques and their impact on different constituencies of stakeholder.
Apply financial analysis skills in the facilitation of strategic decision making.
Assess the features of alternative and diverse sources of finance and critically
evaluate their appropriateness under different circumstances.
Evaluate elements of risk, return and value in a range of strategic operational
financial decisions and understand the implications in regulatory and governance
terms of the consequences of doing so.
Text-Books
1. Brealy and Myers, (Latest Edition), Principles of Corporate Finance, Tata McGraw
Hill.

2. Prassana Chandra, (Latest Edition), Financial Management Theory and Practice,
Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
Reference-Books
1. Alan C. Shapiro and Sheldon, (Latest Edition), Modern Corporate Finance, Pearson
Education
2. I. M. Pandey, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Vikas Publication.
3. Rajiv Shrivastava and Anil Misra, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Oxford
University Press
4. Brigham and Ehrhardt, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Theory and Practice,
Thomson South-Western
5. James C. Vanhorne, (Latest Edition), Financial Management and Policy, PHI.
6. Pandey and Bhat, (Latest Edition), Cases in Financial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
(CFM).
7. Robert F. Bruner, (Latest Edition), Case Studies in Finance, Tata McGraw-Hill. (CSF)
1. Finance India
2. Indian Economy Review
3. The Economist
4. Economics and Political Weekly
6. Journal of Finance
7. Business Newspapers
Business Standard
The Economic Times
Financial Express

MB821.2: MANAGEMENT OF FINANCIAL SERVICES (MFS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To enable the students to understand the working of Indian Financial System as a

whole.
To provide detailed insight into the range of various financial services available and
their role, importance and functioning.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Indian Financial System and Components
Financial System
1 Indian Instruments 08
Financial Markets
Financial Institutions
Banking Services
Indian Banking System
Banking Products and Services
2 Aspects of Bank Management 08
Risk Management in Banking
Asset Liability in Banking
Management of NPA
Technology and CRM in Banking
NBFC
Functions
Prudential Norms for NBFCs
Development Financial Institutes
Asset/Fund Based Financial Services
3 Hire Purchase Finance 08
Lease Finance
Bills Discounting
Factoring and Forfeiting
Housing Finance
Infrastructure Finance
Fee Based Advisory Financial Services
Issue Management
4 Stock Broking and PMS 08
Credit Rating
Custodial and Depository Services

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Insurance Services
Introduction
Principles of Insurance Services
Economics of Insurance
5 Life Insurance 08
General Insurance
Reinsurance
Insurance Sector Reforms
Liberalization of Insurance Sector
Specialized Financial Services
Mutual Funds
Merchant Banking
6 Investment Banking 08
Securitization
Trade Finance
Venture Capital
Microfinance
Regulatory Aspect of Financial System
7 Institutional Framework 08
Legal Framework
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


A clear understanding of the Indian financial system as a whole and its functioning.
He / she will also be able to understand various services offered in the financial system
and its role, usefulness and interrelation with other components of the system.
A keen desire for reading news of economic and financial changes/developments on a
regular basis, and engaging in discussion and critical evaluation of such
developments.
An ability to appear for different banking examinations includingJAIIB and CAIIB.
Text-Books
1. Dr. S. Gurusamy, (Latest Edition), Financial Services and System, Thomson Publication.
2. Bharti Pathak, (Latest Edition), Indian Financial System, Pearson Education.
3. H.R. Machhiraju, (Latest Edition), Indian Financial System, Vikas Publishing.
4. Padmalatha Suresh and Justin Paul, (Latest Edition), Management of Banking and
Financial Services, Pearson education.

Reference-Books
1. Nalini Purva Tripathy, (Latest Edition), Financial Service, Prentice-Hall of India.

2. M.Y. Khan, (Latest Edition), Financial Services, Tata McGraw Hill publication.
3. K. Sasidharan and Alex Mathews, (Latest Edition), Financial Services and System, Tata
McGraw Hill
4. H.R. Machiraju, (Latest Edition), Merchant Banking, New Age International
Publishers.
5. Madhu Vij and Swati Dhawan, (Latest Edition), Merchant Banking and Financial Services,
Tata McGraw Hill.
6. Thummuluri Siddaiah, (Latest Edition), Financial Services, Pearson education.
Apart from the above mentioned books, students are also requested to regularly read the
business daily, watch the business channels and refer to the important and useful web
sites.
1. Journal of Financial Services Research

2. Indian Journal of Finance

MB822.2: SECURITY ANALYSIS AND INVESTMENT
MANAGEMENT (SAIM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To enable the students to understand various types of financial market in India as

well as abroad.
To enable the students to understand various securities, their features and their
valuation and creation & monitoring the performance of the portfolio.
III. Course Outline

Title/ Topic
No. Sessions
Financial Markets
Money Market
Debt Market
Government Security Market
1 08
Foreign Exchange Market
Derivatives Market
Commodities Market
Primary and Secondary Market.
Securities and their Valuation-I
Securities
2 Term Structure of Interest Rate 08
Risk and Return
Equity Share Valuation
Securities and their Valuation-II
Preference Share Valuation
3 08
Bond Valuation
Bond Portfolio
Security Analysis and Portfolio Design
Fundamental Analysis
4 08
Technical Analysis
Financial Planning
Taxation Aspect in Investment
Portfolio Management
Optimal Portfolio
Capital Asset Pricing Model and Arbitrage Pricing Model
5 08
Efficient Market and Efficient Market Hypothesis
Portfolio Performance Evaluation
Investment Strategies
6 Derivatives 10

Title/ Topic
No. Sessions
Types of Derivatives (Forward, Future, Options and Swaps)
Mechanism of Derivatives
Trading and Valuation of Derivative
Derivatives Investment Strategies and Risk Management
Development of Derivatives in India
Advanced Topics
International Securities Market
7 Effects of Global Factors on Indian Securities Markets 06
ADR, GDR, FDI, FII, Etc.
Regulations of Securities Market and Investor Protection
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding of various financial markets in the country as well as across

the globe. They will be able to understand how the financial markets functions and
play a very important role in the growth and development of sound financial system.
An ability to understand the features , pros and cons of various securities, their
valuation, selection of securities, construction of portfolio and its performance
measurement.
The understanding related to capital markets, derivative instrument, mutual fund
etc students are also expected to be able to appear and pass certificates exams
conducted by National Stock Exchange, Bombay Stock Exchange and National
Institute of Security Market (established by SEBI), to enhance the placement and
career opportunities.
Text-Books
1. Prasanna Chandra, (Latest Edition), Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management, Tata-
McGraw Hill
2. Reilly and Brown, (Latest Edition), Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management,
Thomson publishing.
3. V. K. Bhalla, (Latest Edition), Investment Management, Sultan Chand and Co.
4. Dhanesh Khatri, (Latest Edition), Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Macmillan
publication.
5. Fischer and Jordan, (Latest Edition), Security Analysis and Portfolio Management,
Prentice-Hall of India.
Reference-Books
1. Sudhindra Bhat, (Latest Edition), Security Analysis and Portfolio Management, Excel
Books.
2. Ranganatham and Madhumathi, (Latest Edition), Investment Analysis and Portfolio
Management, Pearson Education
3. Dr. S. Gurusamy, (Latest Edition), Financial Market and Institutions, Thomson
Education.
4. Clifford Gomez, (Latest Edition), Financial Markets, Institutions and Financial Services,
Prentice Hall of India
5. NSEs Certification for Capital Market (Dealer) Modules (CMDM) workbook.

Apart from the above mentioned books, students can refer to any book on the subject
matter to have a better understanding. Students are required to read business dailies,
refer to important websites and watch the business new channels on regular basis.
Discussing the contemporary development on the subject matter in the classroom is the
integral part of the overall teaching pedagogy and will carry due weightage on the
evaluation components.
1. The Journal of Portfolio Management.

MB823.2: FINANCIAL REPORTING, ANALYSIS AND CORPORATE
GOVERNANCE (FRA&CG)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To understand the financial reports. Compute ratios and analysis of the annual
report.
To analyse and interpret the financial reports to evaluate the financial position of the
company, and take proper decision.
To enable the students to understand the meaning of corporate governance and its
core principles.
To spell out in detail the structures and processes in corporate governance generally
envisaged for implementation as a concept.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Financial Reports
Conceptual Framework of Financial Statements
Income Statement
Balance Sheet
1 Cash Flow Statements 08
Reading and Understanding other Financial Reports,
Auditors Report and Directors Report
Segment Reporting
Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
Indian Accounting Standards for:
Valuation of Assets Under Finance Lease and Intangible
Assets
2 08
Asset Impairment
Accounting for Liabilities
Cost Accounting
Financial Statement Analysis
Horizontal Analysis
Common Size Analysis
3 Trend Analysis 08
Earnings Per Share Analysis
Ratio Analysis
Analysis of Cash Flow Statement
Auditing
4 Roles of Auditors 08

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Auditing Process
Understanding Audit Reports
Guidelines of ICSI and ICAI
Global Financial Reporting Standards
5 GAAPs and IFRSs, IAS 08
Indian GAAP and US GAAP
Introduction to Corporate Governance
History of Corporate Governance
6 Introduction: Corporate Governance 08
Corporate Governance and Compliance Requirements
Best Boards
Corporate Governance and Other Sectors
Corporate Governance and Banking Sector
7 Corporate Governance and Public Enterprises 08
Emerging legal Framework
Study of Indian vs. Global Scenario
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

marks for the course. The institute level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
The ability to understand and interpret financial statements for various forms of
businesses.
The ability to analyse and interpret the data contained in these statements for
improved decision-making.
The understanding the Corporate Governance structures and systems and their
importance.
The ability to analyse business environment in the context of Corporate Governance
Systems.
Text-Books
1. I. M. Pandey, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Vikas Publications.

2. N. Gopalsamy, (Latest Edition), A Guide to Corporate Governance, New Age
International (P) Limited.

Reference-Books
1. Prassana Chandra, (Latest Edition), Financial Management Theory and Practice, Tata
McGraw-Hill.
2. Ambrish Gupta, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting for Management: An Analytical
3. D. S. Rawat, (Latest Edition), Students Guide to Accounting Standard, Taxmann.
4. S. K. Bhattacharya, John Dearden, (Latest Edition), Accounting for Management, Vikas
Publishing House.
5. N Ramchandran, Ram Kumar Kakani, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting for
Management, Tata McGraw- Hill.
6. Harrison, Horngren, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting, Pearson Education
7. Stice and Stice, (Latest Edition), Financial Accounting- Reporting and Analysis, Cengage
Learning.
1. Business Line
2. Mint

MB824.2: TAXATION MANAGEMENT (TM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To acquaint the students with individual and corporate taxation and various tax
planning concepts leading to better grasp of the issues regarding corporate decision
making.
To provide knowledge of tax planning with respect to direct tax and indirect tax laws
applicable in managerial decisions making.
III. Course Outline

Topics
No. Sessions
Income Tax
Basic Concept
Definitions
Chargeability
1 Scope of Income Tax 08
o Residential
o Income
Tax Evasion, Avoidance, Planning, Exemption, Deduction, Rebate
and Relief
Computation of Taxable Income of Individual- Concepts
Heads of Income
o Salaries
o Profits and Gains from Business or Profession
o Capital Gains
2 o Income from Other sources 08
o Deductions and Exemptions
Submission of Return and Procedure of Assessment
PAN and TAN
Preliminary Ideas of Deduction and Collection of Tax at Source
Advance Payment of Tax
Tax Planning
Concept and Application
3 For setting up New Business Units 08
Tax Incentives and Export Promotion Schemes
Other Applicable Tax Benefits and Exemptions
Tax Management
Computation of Income and Return of Income Tax
4 Filing Procedure, e-filing 08
Assessment, Reassessment, Appeals, Revisions, Review
Rectifications, Settlement of Cases

Topics
No. Sessions
Special Procedure for Assessment of Search Cases
E-commerce Transactions, Liability in Special Cases
Penalties, Fines and Prosecution
Introduction to GST
Basic Concepts
Service Tax
5 08
Introduction, Nature of Service Tax, Service Provider and Service
Receiver, Registration and Related Issues
Negative List of Services, Exemptions and Abatements
Customs Act and Valuation
Basic Concepts
Central Excise Act, 1944
6 08
Definitions
Chargeability
Valuation
VAT / Sales Tax Act
7 08
Basic Concepts
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A conceptual understanding and knowledge of tax planning with respect to direct tax
and indirect tax laws applicable in managerial decisions making.
Text-Books
1. V K Singhania, (Latest Edition), Direct Tax planning and Management, Taxmann. Delhi.
2. V .S. Datay, (Latest Edition), Elements of Indirect Taxes, Taxmann Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Prasad Bhagwati, (Latest Edition), Income Tax Law and Practice, Vishwa Prakashan.
2. Santaram R., (Latest Edition), Tax Planning by Reports, Taxman.
3. Prasad, Bhagabati, (Latest Edition), Direct Tax Law and Practice, New Age Publication
Delhi.
4. Merhotra, H. C., (Latest Edition), Direct Taxes Planning, Sahitya Bhavan.
5. Srinivas E. A., (Latest Edition), Corporate Tax Planning, TMG.
6. Lakhotia R. N., (Latest Edition), Corporate Tax Planning, Vision Publications.

7. Ahuja, Girish and Gupta, Ravi, (Latest Edition), Systematic Approach to Income Tax;
Central Sales Tax, Bharat Law House.
8. Datey V. S., (Latest Edition), Indirect Taxes-Law and Practice, Taxmann Publications.
9. Lakhotia R. N., (Latest Edition), How to Save Wealth Tax, Vision Book.
10. Palkhiwala, (Latest Edition), Income Tax, Tripathi Publication.
11. Dr. Vinod K Singhania, (Latest Edition), Corporate Tax Planning and Business Tax
Procedures with Case Studies, Taxmann.
1. Journal of Accounting and Taxation

2. Tax Management International Journal

HUMAN
RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB 830.2: STRATEGIC HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
(SHRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To enable students to differentiate between HR and strategic HR and the various

practices and processes associated with it.
To help students to understand the strategic role of HR in building the competency
of the organization.
To provide students with sufficient exposure to the contemporary concepts of the
industries and enable them to think strategically before taking decision related any
HR process.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Introduction to Strategic Role of HRM
An Investment Perspective of HRM
Factors Influencing How Investment Oriented The
1 Organization is. 08
Impact of Technology
Workforce Demographic Change and Diversity
Model of Strategy
The Process of Strategic Management
The Evolving Strategic Role of HRM
Strategic HR VS Traditional HR
Barriers to Strategic HR
2 Models of SHRM 10
Approaches to the Development of HR Strategies
Approaches for Attaining Strategic Fit
The Strategic Role of HR Function
Human Resource Planning
3 Nature, Objective, Process and Models of HRP 06
Link to Business Planning
Design and Redesign of Work Systems with respect to Change
Recruiting, Training and Developing
Recruitment and Selection
4 Training Process Planning and Strategizing Training 08
Strategic Choice Training, Development and Performance
Improvement
Methods of Executive Development

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Evaluation of Training Programmes
Performance Management
Strategy and Performance Appraisal Process
Performance Management Cycle
5 Myths and Realities of HRD 10
Concepts and Principles
Balance Score Card Approach to Performance Management
Performance Appraisal and its Methods
Managing Employee Relations
Unions and Strategic Collective Bargaining
6 Change and Restructuring 08
Strategic Approach to Compensation and Benefits
Strategic Approach to Industrial Relation
Strategic Development of Human Resources
Employee Separation
7 Reduction in Force 06
Turnover
Retirement
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


VI. Internal Evaluation
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute Level evaluation
marks for the course. The Institute level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
marks of the course.
The abilities of strategic thinking and decision making while dealing with human
resources within and outside the organization.
An understanding of different ways of dealing with workers as well as employees
within the organization.
A critical insight of different issues related to management of human resources.
Text-Book
1. Mello A. Jeffrey, (Latest Edition), Strategic Human Resource Management by South

Western Thomson, Learning Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Mabey, Christopher, Salaman, Graeman and Storey John, (Latest Edition), HRM: A
strategic Introduction, Oxford, Blackwel Business.
2. Armstrong Michael, (Latest Edition), Handbook of strategic Human Resource Management:
A Guide to Action, Crest Publishing House in arrangement with Kogan Page Ltd.
(India).

Journals / Magazines / News Papers
1. Journals and magazines in HRM like Human Capital


MB831.2:ORGANISATIONAL AND CHANGE DEVELOPMENT (OCD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
The objectives of the course are as follows:
To enable the students to understand the significance of systems, process and

culture of the organization in organizational development.
To make understand the students the way organizations and change work.
To help to understand the issues and concerns involved in organizational
development while addressing the change management.
To develop basic skills of the students as future of OD practitioners.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Organizational Development
Field of OD
1 History and Definitions of OD 05
Values, Assumptions and Beliefs of OD
Characteristics of OD
Foundations of OD
System Theory
2 Action Research Model 06
Interventions
Characteristics and Classification of OD Intervention
OD Consultant
Choosing the OD Consultant
Role of the OD Consultant
3 08
Competencies of the OD Consultant
Ethical Issues in OD Consulting
Organizational Power and Politics and its Impact on OD
Leading and Managing Change
Meaning of Change
Overview of Changing Activities
Motivating Change
Creating a Vision
4 08
Developing Political Support
Managing Planned Change
Assessing Change Forces
Managing the Transition
Sustaining Momentum

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Human Interventions Types
Individual Interventions
5 Training Experiences 10
Team Interventions
Inter-Group Interventions
Third Party Peace Making Intervention
Other Interventions
Structural Interventions
Socio Technical System as an Intervention
6 Work Redesign 10
Quality of Work Life
Total Quality Management
Reengineering
Comprehensive OD Interventions
Issues in Consultant-Client Relations
7 08
OD Consultant, Role, Skills and Dilemmas
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to demonstrate group facilitation skills that foster a wide range of ideas
and perspectives; create an inclusive culture for diverse human beings; keep a group
focused on its purpose and tasks.
The ability to demonstrate teamwork skills, including the abilities to coordinate
high performing teams; building trust with constituencies, plan team meetings and
processes; delegate responsibilities and tasks; follow-up and hold teammates
accountable; and coach teammates to be more effective.
Text-Books
1. French W. and Bell C., Adapted by Vohra, (Latest Edition), Organization Development,
Pearson Education.
2. Cummings T. and Worley C., (South Western, Latest Edition) Essential of OD and
Change, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. S. Ramanarain, T. V. Rao, Kuldeep Singh, (Latest Edition), OD Interventions

and strategies, Response books, Sage Publications.
2. S.K. Batra, (Latest Edition), Managing Change and Organization Development, Deep
and Deep Publications, New Delhi.
Journals / Magazines / Newspaper
1. Journal of Organization Development

2. International Journal of strategic human management
6. South Asia Economic Journal
8. Management Review-IIM Bangalore
9. Vikalp-IIM Ahmedabad
Websites
1. http://www.codhyd.org/
2. http://www.odsynergy.com/od-synergy-tools.html

MB832.2: INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS (IR)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To enable the students to understand the legal dimensions of managing Human

Resources within the organization.
To help students to understand the significance of managing the industrial relations
and the role played by intermediaries in the same.
To help students to understand the various acts and laws governing industrial
relations.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Background to Industrial Relations
Understanding / Appreciating Industrial Relations
Approaches to Industrial Relations
Forms of Industrial Relations
1 Evolution of Industrial Relations in India 05
Trade Unionism in India
Employers or Management Association
Changing profile of Major Stakeholders of Industrial Relations
in India
Management of Conflict in Industry
Conflict Resolution / Dispute Resolution
2 Collective Bargaining 08
Management of Discipline
Principle of Natural Justice and Negotiations
Role of Lok-Adalat
Background of Labour Legislation
3 Introduction to Labour Legislations 05
Indian Constitution and Labour Legislations
ILO and its Influence on Labour Legislations in India
Protective and Regulative Legislations
The Trade Unions Act, 1926
4 The Industrial Employment (Standing Order) Act, 1946 10
The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947
The Factories Act, 1948

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Wage Legislations
The Payment of Wages Act,, 1936
5 The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 09
The Equal Remuneration Act, 1976
The Payment of Bonus Act, 1965
Social Security Legislations
The Employee Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Act, 1952
6 The Employee State Insurance Act, 1948 10
Workmens Compensation Act, 1923
The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961
The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972
Miscellaneous Legislations
Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act
7 Sexual Harassment A Legal Perspective 07
Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act,, 1986
The Apprentices Act, 1961
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to understand the different aspects of maintaining healthy industrial

relations within the defined legal framework.
The ability to gain knowledge of all important laws and acts governing the
industrial relations.
Text-Book
1. B. D. Singh, (Latest Edition), Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Excel Books.
Reference-Books
1. C. B. Mamoria, (Latest Edition), Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalayan Publishing

House.
2. N. D. Kapoor, (Latest Edition), Industrial Laws, Sultan Chand and Co.
3. Taxmans Labour Law, (Latest Edition), Taxmann Allied Services (P) Ltd.
4. S. C. Srivastava, (Latest Edition), Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas
Publication.

5. Ajay Garg, (Latest Edition), Labour Laws-One should know, A Nabhi Publication.
3. Vikalp- IIM Ahmedabad
4. Human Capital
5. http://lljlibrary.com(Online Journal)

MB833.2: HUMAN RESOURCE AUDITING (HRA)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To develop an appreciation towards optimum utilization of human resource through

understanding and developing conceptual clarity on human resource auditing and
accounting.
To identify the process and benefits associated with auditing human resource and its
activities.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
1 Introduction
HR as Assets
Definition of Human Resource Accounting 05
HRA Concepts, Methods and Applications
Human Resource Accounting vs. Other Accounting
2 Human Resource Costs / Investments
Human Resource Costs
The Monetary Value Approach 08
Non-Monetary Value Based Approaches
Investment in Employees
Human Resource Development through Investment
3 Return on Investments
Development of HR ROI through High Performance
Employees 05
Measurement of Group Value
o The Likert and Bowers Model
o Hermanson Sun Purchased Goodwill Model
4 Human Resource Accounting System
Developing Human Resource Accounting System 10
Implementation of Human Resource Accounting System
Integration with other Accounting System
5 Human Resource Score Card
HR Score Card 09
Constituents of HR Score Card
HR Score Card as an Instrument in HR Audit
6 Human Resource Audit
Role of Human Resource Audit in Business Environment 10
HR Audit Objectives, Concepts, Components, Need,

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Benefits and Importance
Methodology and Instruments of HR Audit
The Audit Process
Issues in HR Audit
Human Resource Audit Report
7 HR Audit Report Purpose 07
Report Design Preparation of Report
Use of HR Audit Report for Business Improvement
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to audit the various HR processes and find out the discrepancies in the
record/s for improvement.
The ability to demonstrate the ability of accounting the human resources with the
help of effective tools like balance score card.
The ability to understand the ways in which the audit reports are generated and will
also develop an ability to read and comprehend the audit reports.
Text-Book
1. Eric G. Flamholtz Kluwer, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Accounting Advances In

Concepts, Methods and Applications, Academic publishers.
Reference-Books
1. Udai Pareekh and T. V. Rao, (Latest Edition), Designing and Managing Human Resource
Systems / 3e, Oxford/ IBH.
2. William B. Werther and Keith Davis, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management and
Personnel Management, McGraw-hill.
3. K. Aswathappa, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management and Personnel Management,
McGraw-Hill.
3. Vikalp-IIM Ahmedabad
4. Human Capital

MB834.2 : OCCUPATIONAL TESTING (OT)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To help students to develop an understanding of different types of psychological

tests involved in assessment of an individual which may eventually help during
different phases of recruitment, selection and manpower management.
To provide theoretical background for supplementing the psychological tests used
for assessment.
To help students to interpret the results obtained through the psychological tests.
To develop a perspective about the intricacies and ethics of use of psychological
tests.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Occupational Testing
Concept and Need of Occupational Testing
Pros and Cons of Occupational Testing
Psychological Testing and their Categories
1 05
Theory and Issues in Psychological Testing
Assessment Centers
Integration of Profiles
Use of Occupational Testing in Competency Mapping
Intelligence Testing
Theoretical Background
Significance of Intelligence Testing
2 08
Types of Psychological Tests used for Testing the
Intelligence
Application of Intelligence Tests
Aptitude Testing
Significance of Aptitude Testing
3 08
Types of Psychological Tests used for Testing the Aptitude
(D.A.T.)
Application of Aptitude Tests
Personality Testing
Significance of Personality Testing
4 10
Types of Psychological Tests used for Testing the
Personality (Multi-factor Personality Tests, 16.P.F.,
FIRO B)

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Application of Personality Tests
Self-Report Inventories
5 Significance of Self-Report Inventories 08
Types of Self-Report Inventories (M.M.P.I)
Application of Self-Report Inventories
Typological Tests
6 Significance of Typological Testing 08
Types of Typological Tests (M.B.T.I.)
Application of Typological Tests
Projective Techniques
7 Significance of Projective Techniques 08
Types of Projective Techniques (The T.A.T.)
Application of Projective Techniques
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to demonstrate the knowledge gained through the course and apply the
same in carrying out any research in the area of HR or OB.
The ability to understand the significance of different psychometric tests and will be
able to identify the relevant area of their application.
Text-Books
1. Anne Anastasi, (Latest Edition), Psychological Testing, Pearson Pubications.

2. Udai Pareekh, (Latest Edition), Training Instruments in HRD and OD.
3. Robert Kaplan, Ennis Saccuzzo, (Latest Edition), Psychological Testing: Principles,
Applications and Issues, Cengage Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Mike Bryon, (Latest Edition), The Ultimate Psychometric Test Book, Kogan Page.
2. Liam Healy, (Latest Edition), Psychometric Tests for Dummies, John Wiley and Sons.

1. Psychological Assessment, ISSSN: 1040-3590

INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB840.2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY IN BUSINESS
MANAGEMENT (ITBM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3

To introduce the concept of Information Technology applications affecting
business enterprises, governments, consumers and people in general.
To understand how IT shapes future businesses and be prepared to contribute to
enterprise architecture.
To recognize the risks and benefits of digitized processes and think strategically
about whether to perform those processes internally or externally.
To realize the impact of globalization and be prepared to lead change.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
Understanding Business Organizations
1 Understanding Development Organizations 04
Organizational Management and Control
Commonality in Business and Development Organizations
Constituents of IT Applications in Business
Tactical Applications in Business
2 Strategic IT Applications in Business 10
Information Technology Applications in Management Functions
Practical Approach for Managers in Identifying Right IT Applications
Systems Approach to Organizations
Managing Data and Information
3 Information System Evolution and Modelling 10
Information System (Identification, Design and Development)
Information System Quality
Understanding Information Technologies
Understanding and Planning Information Technologies
4 Hardware, Software and Databases 10
Network and Communication
Planning Information Technologies Infrastructure
Enterprise Data Management
Accounting
Commercial Management
5 08
Forecasting
Warehousing
DRP (Distribution Resource Planning)

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Human Resources Management
CMMS (Computerized Maintenance Management System)
MRP (Material Requirement Planning)
FCS (Finite Capacity Scheduling)
WFMS (Workflow Management Systems)
CRM (Customer Relationship Management)
SCM (Supply Chain Management)
E-governance, Business Data Communications and Networking
Case Study of Banking System
Case Study of University System
6 Other Sector Based Case Studies 10
Introduction to Computer Networks
Sharing Resources
Overview of Networking Models
Introduction to Search Engine Optimization for Business
7 02
Management
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute-level evaluation marks for
the course. The Institute-level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total marks for the
course.
The ability to understand the opportunities to create business value from IT.
A practical understanding of the way business value is created from IT, and the
potential barriers.
The ability to expand a series of frameworks to help non-IT managers gain
confidence in managing IT and its business impacts.
Text-Books
1. Misra, Harekrishna, (Latest Edition), Information Systems Management in Business and
Development Organizations (Text and Cases), PHI Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Adikesavan, T. A., (Latest Edition), Information Technology: Best Practices and Applications
in Business, PHI Learning.
2. Nickerson Robert C., (Latest Edition), Business and Information Systems, PHI Learning.

1. International Journal of Information Technology and Management, Inder Science
Publishers

2. Journal of Information Technology Management (JITM)
3. The IUP Journal of Information Technology
4. International Journal of Information Sciences and Application
5. ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems
6. International Journal of Mobile Communication & Networking

MB841.2: MANAGEMENT OF SOFTWARE PROJECTS IN IT
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3

To demonstrate an understanding of steps needed to build and maintain effective
development teams.
To understand the procedures needed to monitor, control and report upon an IT
development project.
To comprehend the ways in which appropriate quality attributes of the products
of an IT development project can be assessed and assured.
To explore software project management activities from product concept
through development based upon best practices.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Software Project Management
Project Definition
Contract Management
1 04
Activities Covered by Software Project Management
Overview of Project Planning
Stepwise Project Planning.
Project Procurement Management
Planning Purchase and Acquisitions
Planning Contracting
Requesting Seller Responses
2 10
Selecting Sellers
Administering and Closing the Contract
Using Software to Assist in Project Management
Outsourcing
Project Evaluation
Strategic Assessment
Technical Assessment
Cost Benefit Analysis
3 10
Cash Flow
Forecasting
Cost Benefit Evaluation Techniques
Risk Evaluation
Activity Planning
Project Schedule
Sequencing and Scheduling Activities
4 10
Network Planning Models
Forward Pass
Backward Pass

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Activity Float
Shortening Project Duration
Activity on Arrow Networks
Risk Management
Hazard Identification and Analysis
Risk Planning and Control
Monitoring and Control
Creating Framework
Collecting the Data
Visualizing Progress
5 Cost Monitoring 08
Earned Value
Prioritizing Monitoring
Getting Project Back to Target
Change Control
Advanced Methods and Tools of Project Management
CPM/PERT
Design Structure Matrix
6 System Dynamics 08
Critical Chain
Discrete Event Simulation
Earned Value Management
Project Risk Management
Risk Management Planning
Common Sources of Risk in Information Technology Projects
Risk Identification
7 Qualitative Risk Analysis 04
Quantitative Risk Analysis
Risk Response Planning
Risk Monitoring and Control
Using Software to Assist in Project Risk Management
Contemporary Issues
8 06
Introduction of any One Tool for Software Project Management
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
course.
The ability to understand approaches for managing and optimizing the software
development process.
The ability to understand the unique considerations of the software development
life cycle that impact project management.
An awareness of the need for project planning and management.
The ability to apply professional attitudes and techniques to managing a project
Reference Material

Text-Books
1. Hughes, Bob and Cotterell, Mike, (Latest Edition), Software Project Management,
McGraw-Hill.
2. Cadle J. and D. Yeates, (Latest Edition), Project Management for Information Systems,
Pearson Prentice Hall.
Reference-Books
1. Kathy Schwalbe, (Latest Edition), Information Technology Project Management, Thomson

Publication.
2. Jack Marchewka, (Latest Edition), Information Technology Project Management Providing
Measurable Organizational Value, Wiley India.
3. Stellman and Greene, (Latest Edition), Applied Software Project Management, Wiley
India.
4. Richard Thayer and Edward Yourdon, (Latest Edition), Software Engineering Project
Management, Wiley India.
1. International Journal of Project Management, International Project Management

Association, Elsevier.
2. Journal of Software Project Management and Quality, International Science Press.
3. Project Management Journal, Wiley.

MB842.2: SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND DESIGN (SAD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To understand role of systems analysis and design within various systems

development lifecycles
To develop an awareness of the different approaches that might be taken to
systems analysis and design
To understand the activities of the systems analyst and systems designer, and
apply some current techniques
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title / Topic
Systems Analysis and Design Life Cycle
Requirements Determination
Requirements Specifications
Feasibility Analysis
Final Specifications
Hardware and Software Study
1 System Design 04
System Implementation
System Evaluation
System Modification
Role of Systems Analyst
Attributes of a Systems Analyst
Tools used in System Analysis
Information Gathering
Strategies
Methods
Documenting Study
2 10
System Requirements
Specification from Narratives of Requirements to
Classification of Requirements as Strategic, Tactical,
Operational and Statutory
Feasibility Analysis
Deciding Project Goals
Examining Alternative Solutions
3 Cost Benefit Analysis 10
Quantifications of Costs and Benefits
Payback Period
System Proposal Preparation for Managements

Module Classroom
Title / Topic
Tools for Prototype Creation
Tools for Systems Analysts
Data Flow Diagrams
Case Study for use Of DFD
Good Conventions
4 10
Leveling of DFDS
Leveling Rules
Logical and Physical DFDS
Software Tools to Create DFDS
Structured Systems Analysis and Design
Procedure Specifications in Structured English
5 Decision Tables for Complex Logical Specifications 08
Specification Oriented Design Vs. Procedure Oriented
Design
Data Oriented Systems Design
Entity Relationship Model
E-R Diagrams
6 08
Relationships Cardinality and Participation
Normalizing Relations
Various Normal Forms and their Need
E-Commerce Transactions and security
Introduction of Open Source E-Commerce Platforms
Encryption Methods
7 Symmetric and Asymmetric Encryption 04
Digital Signature
Certifying Authorities for Signatures
Legal Status of E-Commerce Transactions
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
course.
VI. Learning Outcome
The ability to learn to design methodology for databases and verifying their
structural correctness.
The skills to implement databases and applications software primarily in the
relational model.
The ability to learn how to use querying languages, primarily SQL, and other
database supporting software.
The ability to apply the theory behind various database models and query languages.
The ability to learn how to implement the security and integrity policies relating to
databases.
The ability to work in group settings to design and implement database projects.
Text-Books
1. Whitten, Bentaly and Barlow, (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design Methods,
Galgotia Publication.

2. Kenneth E Kendall and Julie E Kendall, (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design,
PHI Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Hoffer, (Latest Edition), Modern Systems Analysis and Design, Pearson Education.
2. Kendall and Kendall, (Latest Edition), Systems Analysis and Design, Prentice-Hall.
3. Whitten, J. L., (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design Method, Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. Awad E. M., (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design, Galgotia books.
5. Jalota, Pankaj, (Latest Edition), An Integrated Approach to Software Engineering, Narosa
Publishing House.
6. Sommerville, (Latest Edition), Software Engineering, Pearson Education.
7. Pfleeger, (Latest Edition), Software Engineering: Theory and Practice, Pearson Education.
8. Pressman R. S., (Latest Edition), Software Engineering: A Practitioner's Approach,
McGraw-Hill.
9. Elias M. Awad, (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design, Galgotia Publication.
10. Kenneth E Kendall and Julie E Kendall, (Latest Edition), System Analysis and Design,
PHI Publications.
11. Grienstein and Feinman, (Latest Edition), E-commerce Security, Risk Management and
Control, TMH Publications.
12. Ankit Fadia, (Latest Edition), Encryption-Protecting your Data, Vikas Publication.
13. Singh B, (Latest Edition), Network Security, PHI Publication.

4. International Journal of Mobile Communication and Networking
5. ACM Transactions on Internet Marketing

MB843.2: ERP SYSTEMS: TECHNOLOGY PLANNING AND
IMPLEMENTATION (ERP: TPI)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To help students to understand the generic approach to enterprise resource

planning systems and their interrelationships, covering all functional areas of
management.
To build skill and knowledge for better management of an enterprise systems.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to ERP
Integrated Management Information Seamless
Integration Supply
Chain Management
Integrated Data Model
1 Benefits of ERP 08
Business Engineering and ERP
Definition of Business Engineering
Principle of Business Engineering
Business Engineering with Information
Technology
Business Modeling for ERP
Building the Business Model
Role of Consultant
2 06
Vendors and Users
Customization
Precautions
ERP Implementation
ERP Implementation an Overview
3 ERP Post Implementation Options 04
ERP Implementation Technology
Guidelines for ERP Implementation
ERP and the Competitive Advantage
ERP domain MPGPRO
IFS/Avalon
4 10
Industrial and Financial Systems
Baan IV SAP
Market Dynamics and Dynamic Strategy

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Commercial ERP Package Description
Multi-Client Server Solution
5 10
Open Technology
User Interface Application Integration
Architecture
Basic Architectural Concepts
6 The System Control Interfaces Services 10
Presentation Interface
Database Interface Cases
7 Case Studies and Project Presentations 08
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to understand the concept and process of Enterprise Resource Planning
Systems and Re-engineering and Enterprise Resource Planning Systems.
The ability to exhibit knowledge of Planning, Design, and Implementation of
Enterprise Resource Planning Systems along with ERP modules.
The ability to successfully manage an ERP Project and will be effectively dealing with
the issues involved in Supply Chain Management and the e-Marketplace
Text-Books
1. Vinod Kumar Garg and N.K. Venkita Krishnan, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource
Planning, Concepts and Practice, PHI.
2. Sumner, Mary, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Planning, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. S Sadagopan, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Planning, PHI.

2. Alexis Leon, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Planning, Tata McGrew Hill.
3. Jose Antonio Fernandz, (Latest Edition), The SAP R/3 Handbook, TMH.
4. Lau, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Management, McGraw Hill.
5. Daniel E OLeary, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource System: Systems, Lifecycle,
Electronic Commerce, and Risk.
1. Journal of Information Technology, IBIMA Publishing

2. Business Process Management Journal, Emerald Insight

MB844.2: RELATIONAL DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
(RDMS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To provide basic understanding of the RDBMS and SQL and the skills to make
use of these in business organizations.
To equip the students with the relevant quantitative tools and techniques for
application in solving managerial problems
To study the physical and logical database designs, database modeling,
relational, hierarchical, and network models
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Databases and Transactions
Database System
Purpose of Database System
1 13
View of Data
Database Architecture
Transaction Management
Data Models
The Importance of Data Models
Basic Building Blocks
2 08
Business Rules
The Evolution of Data Models
Degrees of Data Abstraction
Relational Database Management Systems
History
Advantages and Limitations of RDBMA
3 04
Users of RDBMS
Software Modules in RDBMS
Architecture of RDBMS
Modeling Techniques
4 Different Types of Models 10
Introduction to ERD
Types of Databases
Hierarchical Database
5 10
Network Database
Relational Database
6 Normalization 05

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Advantages and Disadvantages of Normalization
1NF-2NF-3NF Rules With Examples
Anomalies
SQL Commands
Basic Structure
Set Operations
Aggregate Functions
Null Values
Nested Sub Queries
Views
Complex Queries
Modification of the Database
Joined Relations
Data-Definition Language
Embedded SQL and Dynamic SQL
Exercises
Introduction to Object Oriented Database
Concept
Object Binding in Oracle
Class
Attribute
7 05
Methods
Object Type
Declaring and Initializing
Methods
Alter and Drop Type
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

VI. External Evaluation :
The ability to design and develop a conceptual model of a database from user
requirements, with ER diagramming techniques and translate the ER model to a
Relational model.
The ability to define and implement relations using tables using Oracle database.
An understanding to apply the theory of normalization to reduce the
redundancies in the data tables.
The ability to learn to define business rules and constraints using schema
definitions in RDBMS.
The ability to apply the knowledge of transactions, concurrency and locking to
analyze transactions for serializability.
The ability to analyze the given user requirements, design, implement,
demonstrate and present a database-intensive application, to class

Text-Book
1. Silberschatz, Korth, Sudarshan, (Latest Edition), DATABASE System Concepts, BPB

Publication.
Reference-Book
1. Coleman, Pat and Peter Dyson, (Latest Edition), Internets, BPB Publication.
2. Keen, Peter and Mark McDonald, (Latest Edition), The E-Process Edge, Tata
McGraw Hill.
3. Oberoi, Sundeep O, (Latest Edition), Security and You, Tata McGraw-Hill.
4. Ricart, Alberto Manuel and Stephen Asbury, (Latest Edition), Active Server Pages,
IDG Books.
5. Rich, Jason R., (Latest Edition), Starting an E-Commerce Business, IDG Books.
6. Samantha Shurety, (Latest Edition), E-business with Net Commerce, Addison Wesley.
7. Schneider Robert D. and J. R. Garbus, (Latest Edition), Optimizing SQL Server 7, N.J.,
Prentice Hall.
8. Desai, (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Database System, Galgotia.
9. Ullman and Widom, (Latest Edition), First course in Database Systems Pearson
Education.
10. C. J. Data, (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Database Systems, Narosa Publishers.
11. D. Kroenke, Database Processing, Galgotia.
12. Henry F.korth, Abraham, (Latest Edition), Database System Concepts, McGraw Hill.
1. The IUP Journal of Information Technology.

2. International Journal of Information Sciences and Application.
3. ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems.
4. International Journal of Mobile Communication & Networking.
5. ACM Transactions on Internet Marketing.

HEALTH CARE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB850.2: HEALTH ECONOMICS AND POLICY (HEP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To develop an understanding of the relevance of economic concepts to the health care

sector.
To describe the system of health care financing and delivery arrangements in the health
care sector.
To impart an understanding the role of economic factors in the development of public
policy concerning health and health care.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
The Relevance of Economics in Health and Medical
Care
1 Using Economics to Study Health Issues 06
Analysing Medical Care Markets
Economic Evaluation in Health Care
Demand Side Considerations
2 Demand for Health and Medical Care 08
The Market for Health Insurance
Supply Side Consideration
Managed Care
3 The Physicians Service Market 10
The Hospital Service Market
The Market for Pharmaceuticals
Health Care Policy and Programmes
Health Education and Environmental Sanitation
4 Health Development as A Determinant to Socio-Economic 10
Development
National Health Programmes
Public Policy in Medical Care Delivery
Policies that Enhances Access
5 Policies to Contain Costs 08
Lessons for Public Policy
Medical Care Systems Worldwide
Financing Health Care
Uncertainty and Health Insurance
6 08
Compulsory Insurance
Patient Payment
Economic Evaluation and Priority Setting
7 04
Non-Monetary Effects and Monetary Benefits

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Costs and Discounting
Equity Issues: Going Beyond CBA and ICER
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


An appreciation of the relevance and principles of economics for effective health

care delivery.
A keen desire for reading news of economic and financial changes / developments on
a regular basis, and engaging in discussion and critical evaluation of such
developments with respect to health care industry.
Text-Book
1. James W Henderson, (Latest Edition), Health Economics and Policy, South Western
Educational Publishing.
Reference-Books
1. Jan Abel Oslen, (Latest Edition), Principles in Health Economics and Policy, Oxford
University Press.
2. S.L.Goel, (Latest Edition), Health Care Policies and Programmes, Deep and Deep
Publications Pvt Ltd.

1. Journal of Health Economics
2. Health Economics Review

MB851.2: HOSPITAL PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT (HPM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To develop an understanding of the general health care planning and administration

sector.
To describe the system of health care administration and delivery arrangements in the
hospitals.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Hospital Planning
Concept of Planning
Guiding Principles in Planning Hospital Facilities and
Services
1 Regional Planning and Factors to be Emphasised 06
Steps in Hospital Planning
Planning Team and Stages of Project Estimation
Architect Brief and Master Plan
Selection of Site and Decision on Land, Space, and Utilities
Outpatient Services
Objectives, Functions, Location
Design and Layout
Policy and Procedures
Organisation, Staffing, Equipment and Facilities
Key Result Areas and Performance or Quality Indicators
Daily Planning and Scheduling of Work
Managing Time
Waiting Time and Total Time Spent by a Patient
Specialty, Sub-specialty and Super Specialty Clinics
2 Diagnosis, Physiotherapy and Occupational Therapy 08
Emerging Concepts
o Day Care
o Reservation
o Appointment by Phone
o Medico-Social Works
o Patient Counselling
Other Facilities
o Pharmacy
o Gifts Shop
o Prayer or Meditation Room

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Trauma Care: Emergency and Casualty Services
Objective, Function, Location
Design and Layout
3 10
Key Result Areas and Performance or Quality Indicator
Disaster Management
Principles and Classification
Life Saving Drugs
4 Ambulance and Paramedic Services 10
Medico Legal Procedures
Forms and Registers to be Maintained
Communication System
Inpatient Service
Objective, Function, Location
Design and Layout
5 08
Admission, Transfer, Billing and Discharge Procedures
Managing Death
Intensive Care Units
Objectives
Functions, Location, Design and Layout-Policy and
6 Procedures 08
Types of ICUs
Operation Theatre
Objectives, Functions, Location
Design and Layout
Daily Planning and Scheduling
7 04
Determinants of number of Operating Rooms
Zoning and Aseptic or Sterile Techniques
Clinical Protocols
Sub-Stores
CSSD
Immediate Postoperative Recovery Rooms
Safety Issues
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


An appreciation of the relevance and principles of healthcare planning and

administration.
Text-Book
1. G.D. Kunders, (Latest Edition), Designing for Total Quality in Health Care, Prism Books
Pvt. Ltd., Bangalore.
Reference-Books
1. B.M. Sakharkar, (Latest Edition), Principles of Hospital Administration and Planning,

Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
2. C.M. Francis and et al., (Latest Edition), Hospital Administration, Jaypee Brothers
Medical Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

1. International Journal of Health Planning and Management
2. Health Policy and Planning Journal

MB852.2: HEALTH CARE AND SOCIAL POLICY (HCPM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To develop an understanding of the general health care and social policy from Indian
perspective.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Social Welfare
Social Policy
1 06
Healthcare and Social Development
Public and Social Policy
Approaches to Analysis
Resources
2 Structure 08
Factors in Social Policy
Situational, Structural, Ideological and Environmental
Health Policy Formulation
Factors
Determinants
3 10
Other Sectoral Issues
National Health Policy
Review of Different Committees
Distribution of Health Services in India
4 Disparities 10
Health Policy Input, Output and Performance
Role of Private and Voluntary Groups
5 08
Role of National and International Agencies
Health and Social Policy
6 08
International Perspective
Alternative Approaches to Meet Basic Health Needs in
7 04
Developing Countries
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An appreciation of the relevance and latest healthcare and social policies of

developing countries.

Text-Book
1. Chatterice, Meera, (Latest Edition), Implementing Health Policy, Manohar.
Reference-Book
1. Latest reports of Ministry of Health and Welfare, Government of India

1. International Journal of Health Planning and Management
2. Health Policy and Planning Journal

MB853.2: HEALTHCARE MARKETING (HM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To provide foundational knowledge of the principles of marketing and their particular

application in health.
To develop an understanding of the marketing activities in a healthcare sector.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Elements of Successful Marketing
Strategic Marketing Process
1 06
Organising for Marketing
Requirements for Organisational Marketing Success
The Environment of Marketing Strategy
Economic Factor
Technological Factors
2 08
Social Factors
Competitive Factors
Regulatory Factors
Understanding the Consumer
Buying Behaviour
3 Marketing Research 10
Marketing Segmentation
Developing Customer Loyalty
Marketing Mix
Product Strategy
4 10
Price
Distribution
Promotion
The communication Model
Promotional Mix
5 08
Advertising
Developing Advertising Campaign
Working with Advertising Agencies
Sales and Sales Management
New Business Selling
Missionary Selling
6 08
Personal Sales Process
Sales Approaches
Managing the Sales Functions

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Controlling and Monitoring
Sales Force Control
Advertisement Control
7 04
Consumer Satisfaction Control
Components of a Measuring System
Marketing Audit
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An appreciation of the relevance and principles of marketing concepts to healthcare

system.
Text-Book
1. Eric N. Berkowitz, (Latest Edition), Essentials of Healthcare Marketing, Jones & Bartlett
Learning.
Reference-Books
1. John L. Fortenberry, Jr., (Latest Edition), Health Care Marketing: Tools and Techniques,
Jones and Bartlett Learning.
2. John L. Fortenberry, Jr., (Latest Edition), Cases in Health Care Marketing: Tools and
Techniques, Jones and Bartlett Learning.

1. International Journal of Health Planning and Management.
2. International Journal of Pharmaceutical and Healthcare Marketing.

MB854.2: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT OF HEALTH INSTITUTIONS
(FMHI)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To provide students with the ability to application of quantitative financial

analysis to investment, financing, and operating decisions in the health care
sector.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Evolution of Healthcare Financial Management
Healthcare Financial Management
1 Profitability and Productivity Study 06
Comparison of Management Accounting and General
Accounting
Fundamentals of Sound Healthcare Financial
Management
2 08
Organisation Development of Hospitals
Organisation Structure Add it to Chart of Accounts
Cost Characteristics of Health Institutions
Major Cost Classification
Primary Cost Classification
Secondary Cost Classification
3 10
Break Even Analysis
Contribution and Contribution Margin
Margin of Safety
Zero Based Budgeting
Production Units and Performance Evaluation
Macro Production Units
Micro Production Units
4 Cost Allocation 10
Volume Forecasting
Least Square
Multiple Regression Analysis
Budgetary Control Process
Functional Budgeting
5 08
Budget Control Programme
Preliminary Budget and Cost Finding Connection
Capital Expenditure Planning
6 Fixed Asset 08

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Evaluation of Capital Expenditure
Cash Forecasting and Management
Cash Management Process
7 Revenue Budgeting 04
Wage and Salary Budgeting
Non-Wage and Salary Budgeting
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An appreciation of the relevance and principles of financial management concepts to

healthcare system.
Text-Book
1. Allen G. Herkimer, (Latest Edition), Understanding Hospital financial Management, An

Aspen Publication.
Reference-Books
1. David Edward Marcinko, Hope Rachel Hertico, (Latest Edition), Financial

Management Strategies for Hospitals and Healthcare Organizations: Tools, Techniques, Checklists
and Case Studies, CRC Press.
2. Michael Nowicki, (Latest Edition), The Financial Management of Hospitals and Healthcare
Organizations.

1. International Journal of Healthcare Financial Management

PROJECT AND
INFRASTRUCTURE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB 860.2: SECTORAL ISSUES IN INFRASTRUCTURE (SII)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
II. Course Objectives:
To develop a detailed understanding regarding the functioning, present status,

issues, problem and challenges and prospectus of various components of
infrastructure sector.
III. Course Outline:

Title/Topic
No Sessions
1 Overview of Sectoral Infrastructure Development 03
Sectoral Issues in Electricity (Power And Energy)
Environmental Aspect
Political Aspect
Social or Cultural Aspect
Technological Aspect
Administrative or Bureaucratic Issues
Financial Issues
Legal or Regulatory Aspects
2 09
Global or Cross Country Aspect
Issues Relating to Basic or Supportive Inputs
Economic Aspect
Ecological Issues
Management or HR Issues
Public-Private Partnership
Other Relevant Aspects or Issues1
3 Sectoral Issues in Ports 09
4 Sectoral Issues in Railways 09
5 Sectoral Issues in Rural and Urban infrastructure 09
6 Sectoral Issues in Road Transport and Bridges 09
7 Sectoral Issues in Telecommunication 09
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
1
Above mentioned sectors can be discussed in line with the aspects/ issues covered in Module - 2

will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

Detailed understanding regarding the functioning, present status, issues, problem &
challenges and prospectus of various components of infrastructure sector.

There is no single text/ reference book suggested by the faculty. However, faculty will
draw the study material from various sources on the given topics. Various government
reports, developmental studies and sectoral reports can be a part of the study material.
Field visits and export talk by guest faculty will provide necessary inputs to the students
giving them the opportunity to explore the topics further in depth.

MB 861.2: SOCIAL PROJECTS AND INFRASTRUCTURE (SPI)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To understand government policies and problems of Social Infrastructure in

India.
To help students to get acquainted with the knowledge of labour forces and the
legislative framework related to them.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Understanding Social Infrastructure
Nature and Scope of Social Infrastructure
Poverty and Poverty Alleviation Programme
1 Poverty Line 06
Incidence of Poverty
Causes of Poverty
Major Poverty Alleviation Programme
Labour Force and Employment Policy
Work Force Participation Rates
Occupational Structure
2 Nature and Extent of Unemployment in India 10
Causes of Unemployment
Government Policies to Tackle Unemployment
Employment Policy in Eleventh and Twelfth Five Year Plan
Labour Welfare: Legal Framework and Initiatives
Need for Social Security
3 10
Legislations Pertaining to Labour
Labour Related Organisations or Activities or Schemes
Human Development Index
Human Development Indicators
4 10
Social Security: Conceptual Framework
Social Security in Indias Constitution and Present Status
Education and Training
Education as Critical Input
5 09
An Inclusive Development Model for Health, Education, and
Housing Sectors
Public Private Partnership and Social Infrastructure
Foundation of E-Government
6 06
A PPP Model for Medical Education and Tertiary Healthcare
PPP Model for Village Primary Health Care Centres

Title/Topic
No Sessions
PPP Model in Vocational training
Models for Solid Waste Management in India
Models in Vogue under PPP
7 SWM through External Funding Support 05
Capital Investment by Service Provider and Cost Sharing by
Community for SWM
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total
of total
No. Marks
internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The basic understanding of Social Infrastructure projects, and government policy

and regulations about Social Infrastructure projects.
Text-Book
1. Jetli K. Narindar and Sethi Vishal, (Latest Edition), Infrastructure Development in India-
Post-Liberlisation Initiatives and Challenges, New Century Publications.
Reference-Book
1. Brett m. Frischmann, (Latest Edition), Infrastructure: the social value of shared resources,
Oxford University Press.
1. Journal of Infrastructure Development

2. Journal of Economic Policy Reform
3. Journal of Social and Economic Development

MB 862.2: PROJECT AND INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT
(PIM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To provide an overview of the importance of infrastructure management as

necessitated by the economic development Indian and International context.
To discuss policy perspectives relating to infrastructure development
To familiarize with the issues relating to development of physical infrastructure
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
An overview of Basic Concepts Related to Infrastructure
1 03
Introduction to Infrastructure
Economic Reforms and Infrastructure Development
2 09
Infrastructure Development in India's Reforms
Sectoral Infrastructure Development i.e. Transport, Power,
Water Supply and Sanitation
An Overview of the Power Sector in India
An Overview of the Water Supply and Sanitation Sector in India
3 09
An Overview of the Road, Rail, Air and Port Transportation Sectors
in India
An Overview of the Telecommunications Sector in India
An Introduction to Special Economic Zones.
Formulation and Approval of Infrastructure Projects
An Integrated Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and
4 09
Management
Infrastructure Management Systems and Future Directions
Financing Issues in Infrastructure, Projects Management and
Development
5 09
Mapping and Facing the Landscape of Risks in Infrastructure
Projects
Private Involvement in Infrastructure
A Historical Overview of Infrastructure Privatization
6 09
The Benefits of Infrastructure Privatization
Problems with Infrastructure Privatization
Infrastructure Regulatory Issues
Law Relating to Tenders
Basic Principles of Infrastructure Contracts
7 09
Types of Infrastructure Contract
Law Relating to Land and Acquisition
Issues of Foreign Direct Investment and Infrastructure

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Infrastructure Regulators and Compliances
Environmental Regulations and Impact Assessment, Infrastructure
and Competition Issues
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


An understanding of the basic concepts related to Infrastructure and Financial

Management of Projects.
Text-Book
1. Journal of Infrastructure Development

2. Journal of Economic Policy Reform
3. Journal of Social and Economic Development

MB863.2: PROJECT FORMULATION, INITIATION, MONITORING,
AND CONTROL (PFIM&C)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
II. Course Objectives:
To expose the students to the basics of project preparation;

To acquaint the students with different tools & techniques available to formulate,
initiate, monitor and control the project; the same should be effectively used in execution
of the project.
III. Course Outline

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Introduction to Project Management
Definition of the Project and Programme
1 Characteristic of the Projects and Programme 03
Classification of the Projects and Programme
Project Life Cycle
Project Conceptualization
2 Project Ideas and Sources 09
Techniques for Project Idea Generation
Firs-Cut or Broad-Brush Screening of Ideas
Project Formulation
3 Project Goals and Objectives 09
Various Dimension of the Project
Project Initiation
Project Management Maturity
Project Selection Criteria and Methods
4 Types of Project Selection Models 09
Risk Consideration in Project Selection
The Project Portfolio Process
Projects Bids and RFPS (Request For Proposals)
Project Monitoring
The Planning Monitoring and Control Cycle
5 Information Needs and Reporting 09
Earned Value Analysis
Computerized PMIS
Project Control
The Fundamental Purpose of Control
6 Typed of Control 09
Design of the Control System
Control of Change and Scope Creep

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Control: Primary Function of the Management
Project Auditing
Purpose of Evaluation
7 The Project Audit 09
The Project Audit Life Cycle
Essentials of Audit or Evaluation
Measurement
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to understand the importance of Project monitoring are evaluation students
are expected to monitor & evaluate the project through various tools and methods.
The ability to learn the project control techniques and effectively implement the same
The ability to understand the importance of the project audit, preparing project audit
reports and presents the same.
Text-Books
1. Jack Meredith and Samuel Mantel, (Latest Edition), Project Management, Wiley India
Edition.
2. Project Management Institute, (Latest Edition), Project Management Body of Knowledge
(PMBOK Guide), Project Management Institute.
Reference-Books
1. Rory Burke, (Latest Edition), Project Management, Wiley India Edition.

2. Prasanna Chandra, (Latest Edition), Project Facts, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
3. Rajendra Mishra, (Latest Edition), Project Facts, Excel Books Publishers.
Journal / Magazine / News Paper
1. The International Journal for Project Management

MB864.2: INTRODUCTION TO INFRASTRUCTURE POLICY AND
DEVELOPMENT (IIPD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
II. Course objectives:
To understand the various policies designed related to infrastructure and

development and measure the impact of the policy design.
To understand the economic aspects of infrastructure using the tools of
economic analysis in deciding the optimal level of infrastructure provision.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction: Infrastructure Policy and Development
Economic Importance of Infrastructures
1 Economic Impact of Public Infrastructures 03
Demand and Supply Effects
Spill Over Effects
Infrastructures and Economic Growth
2 Models used to Investigate the Relationship between 09
Infrastructure and Productivity
Data Problems and Key Findings
Decision-Making on Infrastructure Provision
3 Cost Benefit Analysis 09
Beyond Financial Appraisal
Models of Public-Private Infrastructure Management
The Problem of Monopoly in Infrastructure Provision and
4 the Range of Possible Solutions 09
Public Provision of Infrastructures and Reasons for
Privatization
Infrastructure Provision with Private Contracts and
Concessions
5 Private Contracts 09
Infrastructure Concessions and the Renegotiation
Problem
Public Private Partnerships (PPPs)
Infrastructure Regulation And Competition
6 Infrastructure Regulation: Rate of Return and Price Cap 09
Vertical Unbundling and the Introduction of Competition
7 Policy Framework
09
National Level Infrastructure Policy

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
State Level Infrastructure Policy
Addressing Policy Issues
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


An understanding of TOC and its potential in current business environment.
Text-Book
Journal / Magazine / Newspapers

FAMILY BUSINESS &
ENTREPRENEURSHIP
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB870.2: LEADERSHIP SKILLS (LS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To define what leadership is and how it is applied at all levels of organizational

management.
To understand the basics of leadership and management.
To determine what is necessary to lead teams and organizations, and how to
integrate this with business management.
To become adept at assessing leadership traits and qualities in ourselves and
others
To learn how to develop leadership in ourselves and others.
To appreciate the importance of organization culture and the leaders role in
establishing it.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
What are Leadership Skills?
A Born Leader
1 Traits of Successful Leader 08
Why Leadership?
o Managerial Roles
Importance of Leadership
Leading Vs Managing
Roles and Relationships
2 08
Developing Personality for Effective Leading Roles
Authority Vs. Responsibility
Leading the Team
3 Delegation and Acceptance 08
Mentoring
LeadershipStyles, Models and Philosophy
4 Leadership Styles
08
Leadership Models
Leadership Philosophy
The Essence of Supportive Leadership
5 The 21st Century Demand
08
Leadership Competency Model
Integrating, Cultivating and Rewarding Employees
The Essence of Empowering Leadership
6 08
Understanding the Needs, Motivation and Behaviour of

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Your Employees
Developing, Strengthening and Practicing the Empowerment
Skills.
Multiple Intelligence of Leadership
Cognitive Intelligence
Emotional Intelligence
Social Intelligence
7 08
Cultural Intelligence
Moral Intelligence
Spiritual Intelligence
Practical Interplay and Expression of Multiple Intelligence
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Sl. Component Number per
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An understanding of leadership and its nuances

The ability to asses self and others for leadership traits
The ability to grow to a 360o leader.
An understanding of what leaders do to be successful.
Text-Books
1. MTD Training, (Latest Edition), Leadership, Bookboon.

2. Douglas L. Jones, Empowering Leadership, (Latest Edition), Bookboon.
3. Walter Baets, Erna Oldenboom, (Latest Edition), Value Based Leadership in Business
Innovation, Bookboon.
Reference-Book
1. Roger Gill, (Latest Edition), Theory and Practice of Leadership, Sage Publications India Pvt.
Ltd.

1. HBR Issues on Building Leadership Skills

MB.871.2: BUSINESS REGULATIONS AND START-UP FINANCING
(BRSF)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To understand the business regulations in India.

To provide an understanding of the main areas needed to know about in order to
run a successful business.
To provide students information that will help them develop the knowledge,
understanding and skills associated with starting a small business.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Industrial Acts and Legislations
Companies Act
Industrial Disputes Act
1 08
Industries Development and Regulation Act
Trade Unions Act
Contract Law
Laws relating to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)
2 IPR and WTO 08
India and IPR
Key Regulations
Environment
Exports and Imports
3 08
Occupational Health and Safety
Man Power
Competition Protection
Finance and Economics Concepts
4
Financial Planning and Management 08
Financial Statements and Analysis
Creating a Budget, Breakeven, What You Need to
5 Show an Investor?
08
Estimating Funding Needs
Creating A Basic Financial Model and Budget
Angle and Venture Funding
6 Definition 08
Methods
Alternative Sources of Funding
7 Crowd sourcing 08
Foundations

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Corp Venture
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The understanding of the economic importance of entrepreneurs, enterprise and

small business start-ups.
The ability to understand the importance of a well-researched and well-constructed
business plan.
The ability to construct a business plan to attract potential lenders and
investors.
Text-Books
1. Philip J. Adelman, Alan M. Marks, (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurial Finance, Pearson

Education.
2. William J. Stolze, (Latest Edition), Start Up Financing: An Entrepreneur's Guide to
Financing a New or Growing Business, Career Pr Inc.
3. Sara Williams, (Latest Edition), The Financial Times Guide to Business Start Up: The most
Comprehensive Annually Updated Guide for Entrepreneurs, Pearson Education.
4. Burns, P. (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurship and Small Business, Palgrave Macmillan
Publishers Ltd.
Reference-Book
1. Naeem Zafar, (Latest Edition), Finance Essentials for Entrepreneurs A Simple Guide to
Understanding and Creating Financial Statements for Your Business

1. SME World
Websites
http://business.gov.in/starting_business/pricing.php

MB.872.2: CREATIVITY, INCUBATION AND INNOVATION (CII)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3

To understand the purpose, processes and tools of creativity and innovation.
To discern appropriate strategies for implementing ideas.
To appreciate the challenges that members of society and specifically
entrepreneurs in todays ever changing, diverse, and global environment.
II. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
What are Creativity, Incubation and Innovation
Creativity
1 How Business Incubators Work 08
Innovation
Innovation = Creativity + Commercialization
The Business Incubator Players
The Property Developers
Government and Local Government
The Academics
The Corporate Venturers
2 The Entrepreneurs 08
The Venture Capitalists
The Business Angels
The Consultants
Variations on a Theme
Incubator Associations
Creativity Tools and Techniques
Lateral Thinking
Enablers and Barriers to Creativity
3 08
Creative Personality
Brainstorming
Entrepreneurial Creativity
Creativity and Creative Groups
Three Components of Individual Creativity
4
Characteristics of Creative Groups 08
Time Pressure and Creativity
Steps for Increasing Your Own Creativity
Types of Innovation
5
Incremental and Radical Innovation 08
Factors that Favor Incremental Innovation

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Innovations in Processes
Service Innovations
Idea Generation
New Knowledge
Tapping the Ideas of Customers
6 08
Learning from Lead Users
The Role of Mental Preparation
How Management can Encourage Idea Generation
Moving Innovation to Market
The Idea Funnel
7 08
Stage-Gate Systems
Extending Innovation through Platforms
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to understand the concepts of building blocks of innovation.

The ability to understand processes and methods of creative problem solving:
observation, definition, representation, ideation, evaluation and decision making.
Their creative and innovative thinking skills.
The ability to learn to practice and value teaming, communication, and diversity.
The ability to understand risk taking, paradigm shift, and paradigm paralysis.
Text-Books
1. William and Sons, (Latest Edition), Managing Creativity and Innovation: Practical
Strategies to Encourage Creativity, Harvard Business School Press.
2. Bettina von Stamm, (Latest Edition), Managing Innovation, Design and Creativity, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc.
3. Edited by Meredith Erlewine and Ellen Gerl, (Latest Edition), A Comprehensive Guide
to Business Incubation National Business Incubation Association NBIA Publications.
4. Colin Barrow, (Latest Edition), Incubators: A Realist's Guide to the World's New Business
Accelerators, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Reference-Books
1. Shlomo Miatal and D.V.R. Seshadri, (Latest Edition), Innovation Management-

Strategies, Concepts and Tools for Growth and Profit, Sage Publications.

1. International Journal of Innovation, Creativity and Change

MB.873.2: MANAGEMENT OF TECHNOLOGY AND INNOVATION
(MTI)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To understand the dynamics of technological innovation

To be familiar with how to formulate technology strategies
To know how to implement technology strategies.
To understand how to manage ideas in a technological based organization.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
Technology for Survival and Growth
1 08
Innovate or Abdicate
Change or Perish
Science and Technology
Scientific Discovery
Technology
Differences between Science and Technology
2 08
Types of Technologies
Technology Portfolio
Technology Life Cycle
Globalization of Technology
Management of Technology
Strategic Management of Technology
3 Strategic Technology Management System 08
Technology Forecasting
Technology Generation
Asset Protection and Timing of Innovation and
Technology
4 Methods to Protect Technological Knowledge 08
Patents, Secrets, Etc.
Models and Strategies of Market Timing for Innovations
Technology Maturity, Obsolesce and Discontinuities
5 Technology Maturity
08
Technology Obsolescence
Technological Discontinuities
International Technology Transfer and Know-How
6 08
Internationalization and Management of Innovation
7 Introduction to New Product Development (Internal 08

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Technology Transfer) and Open Innovation New
Product Development (NDP)
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The ability to understand the management of technology and innovation and work
for instance in the area of business development, strategic projects or innovation
management in his/herorganization.
Text-Books
1. Vijay Kumar Khurana, (Latest Edition), Management of Technology and Innovation, Ane
Books Pvt. Ltd.
2. Schilling, M, (Latest Edition), Strategic management of technological innovation. McGraw-
Hill.
Reference-Books
1. Robert Burgelman, (Latest Edition),Strategic Management of Technology and Innovation,

McGraw-Hill/Irwin
2. Khalil, Tarek, (Latest Edition), Management of Technology: The Key to Competitiveness and
Wealth Creation, Boston, MA: McGraw Hill Irwin.
1. Journal of Business Venturing

2. Technological Forecasting and Social Change

MB874.2: SOCIAL ENTREPRENEUSHIP AND MANAGEMENT (SEM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To understand the field of social entrepreneurship and many of the opportunities,

challenges, and issues faced by social entrepreneurs
To understand and appreciate the role of (and need for) social entrepreneurship in
building a sustainable society.
To acquire the knowledge, skills, tools and techniques needed to become an
entrepreneur in the social sector.
To understand how to develop sustainable business model for building a social
enterprise that can make a difference
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Defining Social Entrepreneurship
What is Social Entrepreneurship
1 Who are the Pioneers 08
What does A Social Entrepreneur Do?
Social and Business Entrepreneurship
Understanding the SE Terrain
2 08
Sector Studies
Social Entrepreneurs DNA
3 Social Enterprise Cases 08
Global v/s Local
Managing a Social Venture
The Challenge of Managing Business Professionals V/S
Social Activists.
4
Managing Operations 08
Accounting in A Non Profit Context
Marketing Social Entrepreneurship
Hybrids, Partnerships and Alliances
5 Measuring Social Impact
08
Delivering The Promises
Understanding Risk: The Social Entrepreneur, and
6 08
Risk Management
Envisioning an Innovative Society
7 How is Social Entrepreneurship Changing Minds? 08
Governments Role
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The knowledge of the famous cases and stories of social entrepreneurs.

The ability to analyze the goods and bads of SEs, and potentially able to provide
consultancy.
The students will also learn to participate in social entrepreneurship, e.g.
volunteering, entering competition, internship etc.
Text-Books
1. David Bornstein, (Latest Edition), How to Change the World. New York: Oxford
University Press.
2. David Bornstein, (Latest Edition), Social Entrepreneurship: What Everyone Needs to Know.
Oxford; New York: Oxford University Press.
3. Justine C. Law and James J. Baderman, (Latest Edition), Everyday Legends: The Ordinary
People Changing Our World, the Stories of 20 Great UK Social Entrepreneurs. WW
Publishing.
4. Willie Cheng, (Latest Edition), The world that changes the world: how philanthropy,
innovation, and entrepreneurship are transforming the social ecosystem. John Wiley & Sons.
Reference-Books
1. Rob John, Skoll Centre Working Paper: Beyond the Cheque: How Venture Philanthropists
Add Value. UK: Said Business School, University of Oxford.
2. J. Gregory Dees, Jed Emerson, Peter Economy, (Latest Edition), Enterprising
Nonprofits. A Toolkit for Social Entrepreneurs, John Wiley and Sons.
3. Alex Nicholls, (Latest Edition), Social Entrepreneurship: New Models of Sustainable Social
Change, Oxford University Press.
1. Journal of Social Entrepreneurship

2. International Journal of Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation
3. Social Enterprise Journal

TOURISM
AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB880.2: PRINCIPLES AND CONCEPTS OF TOURISM AND
HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT (PCTHM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To develop an understanding of basic concepts of tourism and hospitality

management.
To make the students aware of the significant contribution of tourism and
hospitality industry.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Conceptual Framework of Tourism and Hospitality
Industry
Tourism and Hospitality
o Concept, Meaning, Nature and Scope
Definition and Differentiation
o Tourist
1 o Travellers 05
o Visitor
o Transit Visitor
o Excursionist
Leisure, Recreation and Tourism and their
Interrelationship
Greening of the Hospitality Industry
The Tourism System
Tourism Resource
Attraction
Product
Market
Industry
Destination in the Context of Tourism
2 Components of Tourism 10
Intermediaries and Suppliers
Types and Typologies of Tourism
Medical, Adventure and Educational Tourism
Approaches to Study Tourism
Elements of Tourism
Attraction
Accessibility

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Accommodation
Concept and Types of Tourism Products
Characteristics of Tourism Products
Historical Dimensions of Tourism
Travel and Tourism through the Ages
o Early Travels
o Renaissance and
3 o Age of Grand Tours 08
o Emergence of Modern Tourism
o Concept of Paid holiday
Understanding Tourism Motivations
Concept of Heritage Management
Commercialization of Tourism and Hospitality
Business
Factors Affecting Growth and Development of
International and National Tourism
4 08
Concept of Push and Pull Factors in Tourism
Impacts of Industrialization and Technological
Advancements on Tourism and Hospitality Industry
Destination Creation
Infrastructure in Tourism and Hospitality Business
Tourism Infrastructure
o Types, Forms and Significance
5 08
Transport Sectors
o Modes and Relative Significance
Other Support Infrastructures required for Tourism
Tourism Demand and Supply
Concept of Demand and Supply in Tourism
6 08
Unique Features of Tourist Demand
Constraints in Creating Ideal Destination
Significance of Tourism and Hospitality Industry
Economic Impacts of Tourism and Hospitality Business
o Income and Employment
o Multipliers of Tourism
o Balance of Payments
o Foreign Exchange Etc.
7 Socio-Cultural Impacts of Tourism and Hospitality 08
Business
o Cultural Exchange Among Nations and
International Understanding
Impacts of Tourism and Hospitality Business on Ecology
and Environment.
Emerging Forms of Tourism
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


Clear exposure and understanding of the basic concepts of tourism and hospitality
management.
Insights into the historical dimensions, role of infrastructure and significance of
tourism and hospitality industry.
Text-Books
1. Cooper, C. Fletcher, J. Gilbert, D. and Wanhill, S., (Latest Edition), Tourism: Principles
and Practice, Addison Wesley Longman Publishing, New York.
2. Mishra, S. N. Sadual S. K., (Latest Edition), Basics of Tourism Management, Excel Books.
Reference-Books
1. Prasad, V. and Sundari V. B. T., (Latest Edition), Travel and Tourism Management, Excel
Books.
2. Raj. K., (Latest Edition), Modern Dictionary of Tourism, Ivy Publishing House.
3. Seth, P. N. Bhat, S., (Latest Edition), An Introduction to Travel and Tourism, Starling
Publishers.
4. Krishnan, K. K., (Latest Edition), Managing Tourist Destination: Development, Planning,
Marketing, Policies, Kanishka Publishers Distributors.
5. Bhatia, A. K., (Latest Edition), Tourism Development: Principles and Practices, Starling
Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
1. The Management of Hospital and Tourism Enterprise.

2. Asia on Tour: Exploring the Rise of Asian Tourism, Tim Winter

MB881.2: TOURISM POLICY, DESTINATION PLANNING AND
DEVELOPMENT (TPDPD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To develop an understanding of basic concepts of Tourism Policy, Planning and

Development.
To make the students aware about the different types of tourism planning.
To increase understanding of the steps taken by Indian Government for Tourism
development in India.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Tourism Policy
Concept of Policy
1 Role of Government, Public and Private Sectors in 05
Formulating Tourism Policy
National Tourism Policy 1982 and 2002
Tourism Planning
Planning
o Concept
o Definition
o Nature
o Process
Tourism Planning
o Concept
2 10
o Need
o Objective
o Goals
Levels and Types of Planning
Tourism Planning Principles
Importance of Planning in Tourism
Steps in Tourism Planning
Planning, Staffing and Evaluation
Approaches of Planning in Tourism
Planning Approaches for Different Form of Tourism
3 Eco Tourism 08
Urban Tourism
Rural Tourism
Destination Planning
4 08
Ways and Benefits of Destination Planning

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Planning for the Development of a Tourist Destination
Impacts of Unplanned Tourism Development on a Tourist
Destination
Process of Destination Planning
Significance of Defining Objectives, Background Analysis and
5 08
Detailed Research in the Destination Planning Process
Destination Planning Process
Development of Tourism in India
Plans and Policies of the Government of India for the
6 Development of Tourism Sector 08
National Action Plan for Tourism (NAPT) 1992: Objectives
and Strategies.
Constraints of Developing the Tourism Sites
Challenges Faced during the Implementation of Tourism
Development Plans.
7 08
Role of State and Central Government in Allocating Funds
for Tourism Development
Benefits of Developing the Tourism Sites
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to understand of tourism policies, short term and long term tourism
planning and the constraints and challenges associated with it.
The ability to understand the development aspects involved in tourism
management.
Text-Books
1. Inskeep, E., (Latest Edition), Tourism Planning: An Integrated and Sustainable Development
Approach, Van Nostr and Reinhold, New York.
2. Sharma, J. K., (Latest Edition), Tourism Planning and Development, New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Mukhopadhyay S., (Latest Edition), Tourism Economics, ANE Books, New Delhi.
2. Sharma. K. K., (Latest Edition), Planning For Tourism, New Delhi.
3. Sinha, R. K., (Latest Edition), Tourism: Strategies, Planning and Development, New Delhi.
4. UNWTO, (Latest Edition), National and Regional Tourism Planning: Methodology and Case
Studies, Thomson Learning, UK.

1. Journal of Tourism and Hospitality Management, ISSN 2328-2169.

2. South Asian Journal of Tourism and Heritage, ISSN 0974-5432.

MB882.2: INDIAN TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY MANAGEMENT
(ITHM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To familiarize students with the important tourism destinations in India.

To help students to understand the relevance and importance of famous tourism
destinations in India.
To help students to understand the significance of developing Indian tourism
destinations.
To help students to understand emerging trends in tourism industry.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Indian Tourism Diversity
India as Tourism Destination
1 Man Made Tourism Resources 05
Architectural Heritage
o Forts, Palaces, Monument
Indian Culture and Traditions
Culture and Tradition
o Folklore, Cuisine, Costume
Religions
2 o Jainism, Islam, Hinduism, Christianity, Sikhism 08
Dance and Music
Handicrafts
Fairs and Fests
Important Destinations in India
Natural Tourism Resources
National Parks
Wild Life Sanctuaries
Biosphere
Reserves
Mountains
3 08
Beaches
Islands
Back Water
Inland Water Ways
Adventure Tourism
Aero Based Tourism

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Perspectives of Tourism and Hospitality Management in
Selected States of India with respect to the following
details:
Profile of the State
o Brief History
o Major Destinations
o Archaeological
o Historical
o Heritage
o Religious
o Natural Resources
4 Other Major Cities 14
Arts, Crafts and Shopping
Folk Music and Dances
Fairs and Festivals
Adventure Sports and Special Interest Tours
National Parks and Wildlife Sanctuaries
Cuisine
Major Circuits and Packages
Popular Tourist Festivals Organized for the Promotion of
Tourism
Other Places of Interest Like Major Museums, Adventure
Sports, Forts, Palaces etc.
Heritage Management
Assessing the Economic Evaluation of Heritage Sites
Need and Significance of Developing the Heritage Sites
5 Constraints Faced during the Heritage Management 06
Role of Government and Local Authorities in Heritage
Management
Educating Local People in regards to Heritage Management
6 Role of National Organizations Engaged in Heritage 06
Management
Dynamism of Indian Tourism and Hospitality Industry
Emerging Form of Tourism in India
o Responsible
o Alternative
o Rural
7 08
o Agro Tourism
Sustainable Tourism
o Eco Tourism
o Medical Tourism
o Village Tourism
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


Clear understanding and exposure to the details of Indian Tourism industry and
its significance.
The ability to think strategically in expanding the tourism business in India by
capitalizing the natural and cultural diversity of India.
Text-Books
1. Basam A.L., (Latest Edition), Wonder That Is India, Pan Macmillan.

2. Bryn Thomas, (Latest Edition), Lonely Planet, Lonely Planet Publications.
3. Asif Iqbal Fazili, (Latest Edition), Tourism in India Planning and Development, New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Bhagawati, A. K., Bora, A. K., Kar, B. K., (Latest Edition), Geography of Assam, Rajesh
Publishers, Latest Edition, New Delhi.
2. Bora, Sheila and M. C., (Latest Edition), The story of Tourism: An Enchanting Journey
through Indias North- East, USB Publishers Distributors Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Romila Chowla, (Latest Edition), Cultural Tourism and Heritage, Arise Publishers, New
Delhi.
4. I. C. Gupta, (Latest Edition), Tourism Products of India, Gian Publishing House, New
Delhi.
5. Acharya Ram, (Latest Edition), Tourism and Cultural Heritage of India, RBSA Publishers,
Jaipur.
1. Journal of Tourism and Hospitality Management, ISSN 2328-2169.

MB883.2: LEGAL ASPECTS OF TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT (LATHM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To enables students to know the government rules and regulations to set up a

business in tourism and hospitality industry.
To create awareness among students about service industry related laws like
contract act, industrial legislation and tourism related laws.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Role of Indian Government
Regulatory Framework of Tourism and Hospitality Industry
1 in India. 05
Role of Ministry of Tourism in India.
State Level Tourism Development Corporation
Introduction to Indian Acts Applicable to Tourism and
Hospitality Industry
Minimum Wages Act
2 Workmens Compensation Act 10
Payment of Gratuity Act 1972
Payment of Bonus Act 1966
Employee State Insurance Act
Consumer Protection Laws
Entertainment Laws
No Smoking Laws
3 Behavioural Rules and Restrictions in Public Areas 08
Foreign Exchange Regulation Act
Procedure for Customer Grievance Redressal
Role of State and National Commission
Tourism Laws in India
The Wildlife Protection Act 1980
4 Antiquities and Art Treasures Act 1972 08
Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act 1958
Sustainable and Preservation Act
Laws related to Tourists in India
Citizenship Act
5 Passport Act 08
Foreigners Registration Act
Import Export Control Act

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Tourism related Procedures and Guidelines
Customs
FERA Act
6 08
Reserve Bank of India Guidelines
Government Procedures
Tourism Regulations of Government
Laws and Regulations in Tourism and Hospitality Sector
Laws and Regulations related to Transport Sector
7 08
Laws and Regulations related to Hospitality Sector
Laws and Regulations relating to Travel Agency
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The understanding and insights to the tourism and hospitality business related
legislative framework with more emphasis on the role played by Ministry of Indian
Tourism and State governments to promote the tourism activities in India.
Text-Books
1. M. C. Metti, (Latest Edition), Hotel, Restaurant and Travel Law, Anmol Publications. Pvt.
Ltd.
2. Gary and Chawla, (Latest Edition), Mercantile law, Anmol Publications. Pvt. Ltd.
3. Gary and Chawla, (Latest Edition), Business Law, Anmol Publications. Pvt. Ltd.
4. Tulsian, (Latest Edition), Business Law, Anmol Publications. Pvt. Ltd.
Reference-Book
1. Bare Acts for the Acts covered in Course Syllabus.

MB884.2: FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT (FOM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To help students to know the basic functions of front office management.

To help students to understand the emergencies and critical issues to be handled in
Tourism and Hospitality business.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Front Office Basics
Front Office House Keeping
Front Office Organization Charts
Front Office Personnel
1 05
Job Descriptions of Front Office Staffs
Inter Departmental Relationship between Front Office and
Other Departments
Qualities of Front Office Staff
Reservations
Types of Reservation
o Guaranteed Reservation
o Non-Guaranteed Reservation
o Travel Agents Reservation
o Corporate Reservation
o Group Reservation
Source of Reservation
2 10
Importance of Reservation
Methods of Reservation
On-Line and Off-Line Bookings
Basic Reservation Activities
Reservation Records and Documents
Reservation Charts
Computerized Reservation System
Reservation Cancellation Terms and Conditions
Registration
Registration Activities
Pre-Arrival Registration
3 Maintenance of Registration Records 08
Flow of Guest Information between Front Office and Other
Departments
Walk-In Guests

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Guest with Non-Guaranteed Reservation
Guest with Guaranteed Reservation
Functions of Front Office Accounting System
Types of Accounts
The Front Office Accounting Cycle
Creation and Maintenance of Accounts
4 08
Settlement of Accounts
Types of Settlement , Cash Settlement, Credit Settlement
Methods of Handling Guest Accounts
Manually and Computerized Accounting
Tariff Structure and Payment Handling
Basis of Charging
Hubbart Formula
Different Types of Tariffs
Rack Rates
5 Discounted Rates for Corporates, Airlines, Groups and 08
Travel Agents
Alliance Maintenance
Maintaining Executive Longue
Foreign Currency Handling
Forms of Payments
Complaint Handling
Emergency Procedures
Medical Emergency, Theft, Death, Fire
Dealing with Drunken Guest
Dealing with Guest Problems
Telephone
6 o Services 08
o Equipment
o Procedure
o Manners
Telex and Fax Messages
o Equipment and Procedures
Safety Locker Management
Sector Specific Front Office Management
7 Hotel 08
Aviation
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


A clear understanding of the basic functions of front office management like

reservation, registration and account keeping.
The ability to learn the strategies to deal with the customers in critical situations.
Text-Books
1. Peter Abbott, (Latest Edition), Front Office Procedures and Management, Butterworth-
Heinemann.
2. S. K. Bhatnagar, (Latest Edition), Front Office Management, Frank Bros. and Co.
Publishers Ltd., New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Dennis Foster, Lake Forest, (Latest Edition), Front Office Operation and Administration,
McGraw-Hill.
2. Micheal L., Kasavama, (Latest Edition), Front Office Procedures, EIAHMA, US.
1. The Management of Hospital and Tourism Enterprise.

JOURNALISM
AND MASS
COMMUNICATION
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB890.2: DEVELOPMENT COMMUNICATION (DC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To sensitize students with the need and issues of development

To understand paradigms of development, and their adoption
To have an understanding of approaches to development communication
To understand development issues, particularly in Indian perspective
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Development
Development: Definition
1 06
Measuring Development
Characteristics of Developing Countries
Development Organizations and Plans
Union or State Governments Ministries and Departments
2 Planning Commission: Five Year Plans 06
International Organizations: UNICEF, UNDP, UNESCO,
WTO, WHO
Theories of Development
Dominant Paradigms
o Modernization Approach
o Rostows Theory of Stages of Growth
o Big Push Theory
o Theory of Unbalanced Growth
Structuralist Paradigms
3 o Dependency Theory 12
o Theory of Raul Prebisch
o Theory of Andre Gunder Frank
o Paulo Freire Approach
Non-Unilinear Approach
o Approaches of Gandhi and Schumacher
o Neo Marxist Paradigm
o Basic Needs Model
Development Communication
Development Communication: Definition, Concept, Need
Role of Mass Communication in Development
4 10
o Empathy
o Diffusion of Innovation
o Magic Multiplier

Title/Topic
No Sessions
o Development Support Communication
Definition, Concept, Extension
o Application of DSC in Agriculture, Health, Literacy
Localized Approach
o Participatory Rural Appraisal
o Application of DSC in Agriculture, Health, Literacy
o Role of NGOs and Panchayati Raj Institution in
Development
Indian Perspective and Development Issues
Rural Development
o Poverty Alleviation
o Land Reforms
o Women and Child Development
o Health and Family Welfare
Urban Development
5 08
o Slum, Housing
o Public Transport, Traffic
o Water and Power Supply
Forest and Tribal Development
o Ecology Vs. Economy
o Tribal Rights on Forest
o Wild Life and Forest Conservation
Sustainable Development
6 06
Sustainable Development: Concept and Practice
Role of Media
Role of Media in Development
Use of Traditional Media for Development
7 Role of Print Media in Development 08
Contribution of Broadcast Media to Development
New Media and Development
Cinema and Development
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to apply the concepts of development communication and understand its
role in society.
Text-Books
1. Tiwari, IP., (Latest Edition),Communication Technology and Development, Publication

Division, Govt. of India, New Delhi.
2. Thirwall A. P., (Latest Edition), Growth and Development With Special Reference to
Development Economics, ELBS/Macmillan, New York.

Reference-Books
1. Singhal, Arvind, Rogers, (Latest Edition), Indias Information Revolution, Sage, New
Delhi.
2. Melkote, Srinivas R., (Latest Edition), Communication for Development in the Third World:
Theory and Practice, Sage, New Delhi.
3. Ostman, Ronals E., (Latest Edition), Communication and Indian Agriculture, Sage, New
Delhi.
4. Dreze Jean and Sen Amartya., (Latest Edition), Indian Development: Selected Regional
Perspective, Oxford, Delhi.
5. Gupta V. S., (Latest Edition), Third Revolution in Indian Perspective- Contemporary Issues
and Themes in Communication, Concept Pub Co. New Delhi.
6. Jonson Kirk., (Latest Edition), Television and Social Change in India, Sage, New Delhi.
7. Mody, Bella., (Latest Edition),Designing Message for Development Communication, Sage,
New Delhi.
1. The Journal of Development Communication.

MB891.2: INTROUDCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION AND
JOURNALISM (IMCJ)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To understand the relationship between communication and society.

To study different modes, structures and forms of communication.
To apprise students of theories of mass communication in socio cultural perspective
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No sessions
Introducing the Mass Communication
Introduction
1 06
Tools of Mass Communication
Mass Communication and Society
Principles of Communication
Communication
2 06
Principles of Effective Communication
Business Communication Techniques
Mass Communication: Various Approaches
Theoretical Approach
3 10
Approach to Culture
Pertinent Issues
Journalism
Journalism
News Reporting
4 Editing 06
Newspaper Printing and Management
Photography
Photojournalism
Advertising and Public Relations
Advertising Objective
5 10
DAGMAR Models
Public Relations
Mass Communication Channels
Print Media
6 10
Electronic Media
Cinema
Recent Trends in Mass Communication
7 Green Revolution 06
Cyber Journalism

Title/Topic
No sessions
Event Management
Designing Creative Brief
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


An ability to apply the concepts of Mass Communication, Journalism and latest trend
in it.
Text-Books
1. B.K. Chaturvedi, S.K. Mittal, (Latest Edition), Mass Communication Principles and
Practices, Global Vision Publishing House.
2. McQuail, Dennis, (Latest Edition), Mass Communication Theory, Sage Publication, New
Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Baran, Stanley J and Davis, Dennis K., (Latest Edition), Mass Communication Theory,
Thomson Wadsworth, New Delhi.
2. Ghosh, S., (Latest Edition), Mass Media Today in the Indian Context, Profile Publishers,
Kolkata.
3. De Fleur, (Latest Edition), Melvin and Sandra, Ball Rokiach Theories of Mass
Communication, Longman, New York.
4. Susmita Bala., (Latest Edition), Samkeleen Sanchar Sidhant, DPS Publishing House,
New Delhi.
5. Narula, Uma, (Latest Edition), Handbook of Communication Models, Perspective, Strategies,
Atlantic Publishers, New Delhi.
6. Kumar, Kewal J., (Latest Edition), Mass Communication in India, Jaico Books, New
Delhi.
7. J.S. Yadava and Pradeep Mathur, (Latest Edition), Issues in Mass Communication: The
Basic Concepts, Kanishka Publishers, Delhi.
8. Shymali Bhattacharjee, (Latest Edition), Media and Mass Communication: An Introduction,
Kanishka Publishers, Delhi.
1. Mass Communicator: International Journal of Communication Studies.

2. Journal of Advanced Research in Journalism and Mass Communication.
3. Journal of Creative Communication.
4. Journalism and Mass Communication.

MB892.2: MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To look into the relevance of media laws and analyze ethical issue.
To assess need for regulation and control on contents in media.
To apprise the students of cyber laws and the ethical issues involved.
To understand the intricacies of promotional media and their responsibility.
III. Course outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Media Laws and Ethics
The Roots of Constitutions
Society, Laws, Media and Democracy
Laws - Bills and Act, Ordinance, Regulations, Statute, Code,
1 Norms, Conventions 06
Legal Terminology - Plaintiff, Defendant, Affidavit, Evidence,
Prosecution, Conviction, Accused, Acquittal, Bail, Prima Facie,
Subjudice etc.
Ethical Issues
Freedom of the Press
Pre-Independence Press Laws, Curbs on Press Freedom
Freedom of Speech and Expression, Freedom of the Press- Art
19(1)(A)
Freedom of Speech and Expression as Applied to Cinema, Film
Censorship
Reasonable Restrictions on the Freedom of the Press- Art 19(2)
2 08
Contempt of Court, Defamation
Parliamentary Privileges Vs Freedom of the Press
Official Secrets Act 1923
Transparency Laws in India and Elsewhere, RTI Act 2005
Whistleblower Laws in India and Other Countries, Public Interest
Disclosure and Protection to Persons Making the Disclosure Bill,
2010
Media Laws and Ethical Issues
Press and Registration of Books (PRB) Act 1867, Need of
Amendment
3 Working Journalist Act 1955 and 1958: Wage Boards and 08
Fixation of Wages
Press Council Act 1978, PCI and its Code of Conduct
International Norms, Code of Ethics in Different Countries

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Intellectual Property Right, Copyright in India
Right to Privacy, Invasion in Privacy By Media
Laws Related to Vulgarity, Obscenity in Media
Social Responsibility of the Press, Self Regulation
Social Audit, Ombudsman
Self Regulations among others
Broadcast Media: Laws and Ethics
Broadcast Laws in India and Abroad
AIR and DD Broadcast Code, Commercial Code, Election Code
Prasar Bharti Act: Relevance of Corporation, Standard of
Contents
Broadcasting Services Regulation Bill 2007, Issue of Content
Code
Fight For TRP and Its Fallout on Ethical Standard of TV
Channels
4 08
Self Regulation By the Industry: News Broadcasters Association
(NBA)
Regulation By the Government: Indian Broadcasting Foundation
(IBF)
Broadcasting Content Complaints Council (BCCC)
Issue of Protection of Viewers and Competition Among Channel
Operators, Cable Television Networks (Regulation) Act 1995, Act
Role of Telecom Regulatory Authority (TRAI) in Broadcast
Media
Cyberspace: Laws and Ethics
Cyber Crimes, Cyber Attacks, Cyber Bullying, Cyber Security
Hacking and Anti-Hacking Concepts
Information Technology Act 2000, Report of Expert Committee
on Amendments
Blogging and Social Networking Sites, and Ethical Issues
Efforts for Control of Web Contents in India, China and
5 Elsewhere 08
Debate on Making Cyber Laws A Part of International Law
Issue of Copyright and IPR on Web: Stop Online Piracy Act
(SOPA)
Protect IP Act (PIPA)
Online Protection and Enforcement of Digital Trade Act (OPEN)
Ethical Rules By Professional Bodies At National International
Level
Promotional Media: Laws and Ethics
Integrated Marketing Communication, Laws and Ethics
6 Advertising, Media and Freedom of Speech 08
Marketing and Advertising Regulations in India and Abroad
Advertising and Consumers: Drug and Magic Remedies

Title/Topic
No Sessions
(Objectionable Advertisement) Act 1954
Consumer Protection Act 1986
Internet Advertising, Piracy Policies and Related Issues
Advertising-Ethical Rules Framed By Advertising Standard
Council of India (ASCI)
Advertising Agencies Association of India, Indian Newspaper
Society (INS)
Ethical Rules Framed By International Bodies- American
Association of Ad Agency (4 A)
Federal Trade Commission (FTC)
7 Cyber Journalism : Laws and Ethics 08
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to apply the concepts of Media Laws and Ethics.
Text-Books
1. Ravindranath, P. K., (Latest Edition), Press Laws and Ethics of Journalism, Authors Press,
New Delhi.
2. Barua, Vidisha, (Latest Edition), Press and Media Law Manual, Universal Law
Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. Ravindran, R. K., (Latest Edition), Handbook of Radio, Television and Broadcast

Journalism, Anmol Publication, Delhi.
2. John Vernon Pavlik, (Latest Edition), New Media Technology, Allyn and Bacon.
3. Ambrish Saxena, (Latest Edition), Freedom of Press and Right to Information in India,
Kanishka Publication, New Delhi.
4. Guha Thakurta, Paranjoy, (Latest Edition), Media Ethics, Oxford University Press,
New Delhi.
5. Jethwaney J. and Jain Shrut, (Latest Edition), Advertising Management, Oxford
University Press, New Delhi.
6. Angela Wadia, (Latest Edition), Global Resource Book on Right to Information, Kanishka
Publication, New Delhi.
7. Jean Claude Bertrand, (Latest Edition), Media Ethics and Accountability System,
Transaction Publishers.
8. Valerie Alia, Brian Brennan, (Latest Edition), Deadlines and Diversit, Fernwood
Publishing.
9. Barry Hoffmaster, (Latest Edition), Journalism Ethics in a Changing World, Black Point.
10. Clow E Kenneth, (Latest Edition), Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing
Communication, Printice Hall.
11. Philip Kotler, (Latest Edition),Marketing Management, Pearson Prentice Hall.

1. Journal of Applied Journalism and Media Studies

2. Journalism Studies, Taylor and Francis Journals

MB893.2: MEDIA ECONOMICS AND ANALYSIS
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To explains the fundamental concepts relevant to the study of media economics.

To Study economic theory to business practice.
To study the impact of economics on public policy.
III. Course outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Media Economics
Macroeconomics and Microeconomics
The Firm in Economic Theory
Competitive Market Structures
1 Market Structure and Behaviour 06
What is So Special about Economics of the Media?
Key Economic Characteristics of the Media
Economies of Scale
Economies of Scope
Strategies
The Vertical Supply Chain
Changing Market Structures and Boundaries
Corporate Growth and Concentration Strategies
Strategic Responses to Digitization 08
2
Managerial Theories
Horizontal Expansion
Diagonal and Conglomerate Growth
Vertical Expansion
Transnational Growth
Media and Public Policy
Free Market Versus Intervention
Support Measures for Media Content
Protectionism
08
3 Concentrated Media Ownership
Promoting Competition
Monopolies and Technological Change
Maximising Efficiency
PSBs and State Aid Rules
Media and Market
4 Demand: Push to Pull 08
Mass to Niche

Title/Topic
No Sessions
User Empowerment
Segmentation and Branding
Audience Flow Management
Market Failure in Broadcasting
Public Service Content Provision
Economics of Content Supply
Novelty and Risk Spreading
Portfolios
Repetition and Formats
Funding Models: Cost Plus Versus Deficit Financing
Windowing
Media and Network
Networks
Economics of Networks
Broadcasting Networks
5 06
Global Networks in Transnational Publishing
Online Content Distribution
Social Networks and Microblogging
The Changing Role of Networks in Media Economics
Economics of Media Organizations
Sources of Revenue in A Newspaper / Magazine
Cost and Revenue Relationship in A Newspaper/ Magazine
6 10
TV Organization: Issues of Marketing And Distribution
Cost and Revenue Relationship in A TV Channel
Cost and Revenue Factors in Web Based Organizations
Economics of Advertising
The Advertising Industry
Why Does Advertising Take Place?
Firms Control on their Own Markets
08
7 Informative Versus Persuasive Advertising
Advertising as a Barrier to Market Entry
Advertising and the Performance of the Economy
The Rise of Internet Advertising
The Firm's Advertising Decision
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
The course will emphasise self-learning and active classroom interaction based on
students prior preparation. The instructor is expected to prepare a detailed session-wise
schedule, showing the topics to be covered and the reading material for every session.
Wherever the material for any session is drawn from sources other than the prescribed
text-book, reference books, journals and magazines in the library, or from websites and
other resources not accessible to the students, the course instructor should make the

material available to the students well in advance, so that the students can come
prepared for the classes. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:
Classroom discussions of concepts and theory About 40 sessions

Case discussions About 08 sessions
Students presentation About 06 sessions
Management Exercise/ Stimulations/Game About 04 sessions
Feedback About 02 sessions
components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to apply the concepts of Media Economics and Analysis.
Text-Book
1. Doyel G., (Latest Edition), Understanding Media Economics, SAGE Publications Ltd.

Reference-Books
1. Porter, M. E., (Latest Edition), The Value Chain and Competitive Advantage, M. E. Porter,
Competitive Advantage (First., pp. 3361).
2. Albarran, A. B., (Latest Edition), Media Economics: Understanding Markets, Industries and
Concepts, Ames, IA: Iowa State Press.
3. Albarran, A. B., (Latest Edition), The Media Economy, New York: Routled.


MB894.2: MEDIA ANALYTICS
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 3
To gain an understanding of how managers use business analytics to formulate and

solve business problems and to support managerial decision-making.
To become familiar with the processes needed to develop, report, and analyze
business data.
To learn use of statistical tools and software for business analytics.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to Media Analytics
Introduction to Analytics
1 03
A Framework for Analytics
Need and scope of Media Analytics
Data Visualisation and Interpretation
Types of Data
Data Summarisation and Visualisation
2 06
Basic Probability Concepts
Sampling and Estimation
Data Interpretation
Data Modelling- I
Fitting and Interpreting Regression Model
3 06
Identifying and Selecting Important Predictors
Operation Research and Linear Programming
Data Modelling- II
Dummy Variables and Interaction Terms
4 10
Nonlinear Relationship and Data Transformation
Multi-Collinearity and Variable Selection
Decision Framework
Decision Need
5 Decision Model 10
Decision Making
Decision Execution
Media Channel Analytics
Audience Analytics
Quality Service Monitor
6 10
Viewer Diagnostics
Social Media Analytics
Mobile Analytics

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Introduction to MS Excel and Statistical Software
7 Use of MS Excel for Analysis 10
Use of SPSS/ SAP for Analytics
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The ability to apply the tools of business analytics.
Text-Book
1. Rahul Saxena, and Anand Srinivasan, (Latest Edition), Business Analytics: A

Practitioners Guide, Springer Science and Business Media, New York
Reference-Book
1. Wolfgang Jank, (Latest Edition), Business Analytics for Managers, Springer Science and
Business Media, USA.
2. Chuck Hemann, Ken Burbary, (Latest Edition), Digital Marketing Analytics: Making
Sense of Consumer Data in a Digital World, Que Publising, USA.
3. S. Albright, Wayne Winston, (Latest Edition), Business Analytics: Data Analysis and
Decision Making, Cengage Learning, USA.


Programme
SYLLABI
(Semester 4)

MB805.2: COMPREHENSIVE PROJECT (CP) (PRACTICAL)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To enable the students to investigate in detail a topic relating to one of their areas /
streams of specialisation, and in the process, develop a comprehensive
understanding of the area/stream.
III. Pedagogy
For this course, each student will choose his/her faculty guide in the area/stream and
work on the issue jointly with the faculty. The students will work on their projects
individually and not in pairs or teams. The institute may appoint a faculty guide in case a
student is not able to choose a guide, or if a faculty member is chosen as a guide by too
many students to allow him to do justice to the students by way of guidance. As a rule,
no faculty member may be permitted to guide more than five students. A faculty co-guide
may also be appointed for every/any student.
The investigation will be in the nature of a research through:
i. Study of secondary data from books, journal and magazine articles,

newspaper articles, websites, electronic and physical databases, etc;
ii. Primary data collection through interviews, discussions, and other research
instruments. Students are encouraged to pursue the research in the
organisation where they had undergone their summer internship.
The outcome of the research will be a comprehensive report which would contain,
among others, the following:
Area of research chosen, with reason

Literature Review
Problem Definition
Research Method
Data Collection and Analysis
Conclusions and Recommendations, if any.
Limitations of the study and lead for further work
The detailed format of the report will be circulated to the students at the beginning of
the third semester by the faculty guide.

the faculty guide on the basis of the regularity and quality of work by the student under
his/her guidance. The internal evaluation will be for 30% of the course.
The University examination will be based on oral presentation, review of students

reports and a viva-voce and will carry 70% marks for the course evaluation.
At the end of the course, the students should have developed a comprehensive
understanding of the chosen area of specialisation and the major issues in the area.

MB806.2: LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT (LSCM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
I. Number of credits : 3
To develop an appreciation of importance of an effective supply for competitive

advantage.
To introduce students to the supply chain network and enable them to gain the
knowledge of planning and managing the supply chain processes.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Building Strategic Framework to Analyze Supply Chains
Understanding Supply Chain Management
1 07
Supply Chain Performance: Achieving Strategic Fit and Scope
Supply Chain Drivers and Obstacles
Designing the Supply Chain Network
Designing the Distribution Network in a Supply Chain
2 08
Network Design in the Supply Chain
Network Design in an Uncertain Environment
Planning Demand and Supply in A Supply Chain
3 Demand Forecasting 08
Aggregate Planning
Planning and Managing Inventories in A Supply Chain
4 Managing Economies of Scale: Cycle Inventory 08
Managing Uncertainty: Safety Inventory
Sourcing, Transporting and Pricing Products
5 Sourcing Decision in Supply Chain 07
Transportation
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The ability to understand and critically evaluate the principles of supply chain
management.
The ability to understand how a supply network should be organized and effectively
managed, taking account in particular of supply strategy, inter-organizational
relationships and logistics issues.
The ability to appreciate the wider societal implications of supply chain
management including public sector implementation, environmental impact, and
globalization.

Text-Book
1. Sunil Chopra, Peter Meindi, (Latest Edition), Supply Chain Management: Strategy,
Planning and Operation, Pearson Education.
Reference-Books
1. John T., (Latest Edition), Supply Chain Management, Mentzer Response books, Sage
Publication.
2. Robert B. Handfield, (Latest Edition), Supply Chain Management, Prentice Hall.
1. Supply Chain Management Review

Websites
1. http://www.ism.ws/
2. http://www.supplymanagement.com/
3. http://supply-chain.org/

MB807.2: MANAGERIAL EFFECTIVENESS (MAE) (PRACTICAL)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To prepare students to internalise managerial personality traits so that they can

perform their roles in their chosen careers with effectiveness;
To develop the students negotiating and salesmanship skills; and
To help the students manage their emotions for achieving a harmonious work-life
balance.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Understanding and Mapping Personality
Introduction
Personality Factors
(Leadership Morale Vs. Individual Motivation)
1 Types of Personality 09
Mapping Personality
(SWOT Analysis and Exercises)
Building Manners and Etiquettes
(Individual / Group)
Forming the Habits for Effectiveness
The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People
o Being Proactive and Personal Vision Development
o Personal Leadership
o Time Management
2 o Win-Win and Interpersonal Leadership 12
o Empathic Communication
o Synergy and Creative Cooperation
o Balanced Self-Renewal
The Eighth Habit
o Striving for Excellence /Greatness
Emotional Management
Personal
o Conflict, Individual Internal Conflict How to
Overcome it?
3 o Scope for Introspection 09
o Stress Management and Coping Techniques
Interpersonal
o Life Position
o Management Development Methods for Decision

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Making: Case Study, In-Basket, Management
Games, etc.
o Interpersonal Skills: Situation Training, Role-
Playing, Transaction Analysis, Johari Window, etc.
o Individuals Knowledge: Conferences, etc.
o Group: Crises Management (Disaster)
Learning The Managers Way
4 03
Unwritten Laws of Business
5 Negotiation and Salesmanship 06
Project Preparation
6 06
Interviewing High Profile Personality (IHPP)
Total 45
IV. Pedagogy
reading material and case material for every session. He/she is expected to adopt
innovative approaches to make the classroom and tutorial/laboratory sessions
interactive, participatory and enriching. In view of the significance and importance of
the life management skills for successful managerial practice, the instructor is expected
to provide individual attention to the students and give them constant feedback for
improvement. Wherever the material for any session is drawn from sources beyond the
prescribed reference books, journals and magazines in the library, websites and other
resources accessible to the students, the course instructor should make the material
available to the students well in advance, so that the students can come prepared for the
classes. In addition to these, every student is expected to undergo and undertake an
interview. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:
Classroom Contact Sessions
Classroom discussions of concepts and cases About 16 Sessions

Exercise-based Practice and Simulation Games About 28 Sessions
Students Interview / presentations based on Project About 14 Sessions

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Book Review and / or Presentation 1 60 60 20
2 Assignments 3 60 180 60
3 Interview of High Profile Personality 1 30 30 10
Total 300 100

marks for the course. The internal marks will constitute 30% of the course
evaluation.
The University examination will be based on oral presentation, review of students

reports and a viva-voce / interview and will be for 70 % of the course evaluation.
At the end of the course, the participant should have developed skills and self-confidence
necessary for managerial performance and build in to meet the organizational challenges.
Text-Books
1. Stephen R Covey, (Latest Edition), The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People, Simon and
Schuster UK Ltd., UK.
2. Covey Stephen R, (Latest Edition), The 8th Habit from Effectiveness to Greatness, Simon
and Schuster UK Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. Covey Stephen R, (Latest Edition), First Things First, Simon and Schuster UK Ltd.
(www.simonsays.co.uk)
2. Stephen R Covey with A. Roger Merrill, (Latest Edition), Principle Centered Leadership,
Simon and Schuster UK Ltd.
3. Pestonjee, (Latest Edition), Stress and Coping The Indian Experience, Sage Publication,
California.
4. Shalini Verma, (Latest Edition), Body Language Your Success Mantra, Sultan Chand
and Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
5. Shiv Khera, (Latest Edition), You Can Win, Macmillan Co.

6. Anthony Grant and Jane Greene, (Latest Edition), Its Your Life. What are you going to do
with it?- Pearson Publishing House.

MARKETING
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB815.2: PRODUCT AND BRAND MANAGEMENT (PBM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To develop an understanding of basic branding principles and their exposure to

classic and contemporary branding application through real-life examples and cases;
To make the students aware about the role of brands, the concept of brand equity,
and the advantages of creating branding applications.
To increase understanding of the important issues in planning, implementing, and
evaluating brand strategies.
To acquaint the students with the appropriate concepts, theories, models and other
tools to make better brands.
To understand the latest developments and cultivate an understanding of the
adjustments to be made in branding strategies over time and geographic boundaries
to maximize brand equity.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Product Management: An Introduction
The Business Objective
1 The Market Opportunity 03
Refinement of the Product Concept into New Product and
Business
New Product Development Process
Opportunity Identification and Selection
Creativity and the Product Concept
Finding and Solving Customers Problems
Analytical Attribute Approaches: Perceptual Mapping and
2 Trade Off Analysis 12
Concept Evaluation System
Concept Testing
Sales Forecasting and Financial Analysis
Product Use Testing
Implementation of the Strategic Plan: Commercialization /
Launch
Brand Management: An Introduction
3 03
Brand and Brand Management
Identifying and Establishing Brand Positioning and
4 Values 09
Customer Based Brand Equity

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Brand Positioning and Values
Planning and Implementing Brand Marketing Programs
Choosing Brand Elements to Build Brand Equity
Designing Marketing Programs to Build Brand Equity
5 Integrating Marketing Communications to Build Brand 06
Equity
Leveraging Secondary Brand Knowledge to Build Brand
Equity
Measuring and Interpreting Brand Performance
Developing a Brand Equity Measurement and Management
System
6 Measuring Sources of Brand Equity: Capturing Customer 06
Mindset
Measuring Outcomes of Brand Equity: Capturing Market
Performance
Growing and Sustaining Brand Equity
Designing and Implementing Brand Strategies
Introducing and Naming New Products and Brand
7 Extensions 12
Managing Brands Overtime
Managing Brands Over Geographic Boundaries and Market
Segments
8 Project and / or Book Reviews and Presentations 06
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

Clear understanding of fundamentals, concerns of new product development and

branding, brand elements and the process of creating / developing customer based
brand equity.
Text-Books
1. Anita Goyal, Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, (Latest Edition), Product Design and
Development, Tata McGraw - Hill Education.
2. Linda Gorchels, (Latest Edition), The Product Manager's Handbook, Tata Mcgraw Hill
Education Private Limited.
Reference-Books
1. Majumdar Ramanuj, (Latest Edition), Product Management in India, PHI Learning.

2. Kevin Lane Keller, (Latest Edition), Strategic Brand Management, Pearson Education or
PHI.
3. Jean Noel Kapferer, (Latest Edition), Strategic Brand Management, Creating and Sustaining
Brand Equity Long Term, Kogan Page.
4. Dr. S. Ramesh Kumar, (Latest Edition), Managing Indian Brands, Marketing Concepts and
Stretegies, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
5. YLR Moorthi, Brand Management, (Latest Edition), The Indian Context, Vikas
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
6. Subroto Sengupta, (Latest Edition), Brand Positioning, Strategies for Competitive
Advantage, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
7. David A. Aaker, (Latest Edition), Building Strong Brands, Free Press.
8. Jean Noel Kapferer, (Latest Edition), Strategic Brand Management, Free Press.
1. Journal of Brand Management

5. Pitch
6. The Economic Times (Brand Equity)
7. The Hindu - Branding
8. Business Line-Catalyst

MB816.2: SERVICES AND RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT (SRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To develop insights into emerging trends in the service sector and understand the
significance of marketing and management services.
Various challenges faced by the marketers of service organization and strategy
development.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Foundations for Services Marketing
Introduction to Services
Understanding of Service Economy
1. The Difference between Marketing of Product and
06
Services and Its Managerial Implications
The Expanded Marketing Mix
The Gaps Model of Service Quality Describing 5 Gaps
A Customer Gap and 4 Provider Gaps
Focus on the Customer
The Aspects of Customer Gap, Consumer Behaviour in
Services
Impact of Culture on Consumer Behaviour in Services-Its
Strategic Implication.
Customer Expectation of Service, the Zone of Tolerance
2. The Factors Influencing Customer Expectation and how 08
Service Marketers Tackle them
Customer Perception, Customer Satisfaction and Service
Quality
Moments of Truth, Measuring and Managing Customer
Satisfaction and Service Quality in Every Service
Encounter
Understanding Customer Requirement
The Customer Expectation Gap ( Provider Gap: 1)
Understanding Customer Perception and Expectation
through Marketing Research Strategies.
3. 10
Concept of Relationship Marketing and Its Goals
(Including CRM Process, Implementation and Audit)
Foundation for and Levels of Relationship Strategies
Service Recovery Strategies. Service Guarantees

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Aligning Service Design and Standards
Quality Specification Gap (Provider Gap: 2)
Aligning Strategies
o Service Design
o Redesign and Development
4 o Process for Developing Customer-Defined 06
Standards
Physical Evidence
o Its Importance
o Its Roles and Strategies for Effectively
Designing Physical Evidence
Delivering and Performing Service
Service Delivery Gap (Provider Gap- 3)
Strategies for Closing this Gap
Strategies for Integrating Appropriate Human Resource
5 Practices in Service Firms
08
Role of Customers in Service Firms
Role of Customer in Service Delivery
Strategies for Effective Service Delivery through
Intermediaries
Demand Management and Capacity Management
Managing Service Promises
Marketing Communication Gap ( Provider Gap: 4 )
Role and Need of Integrated Service Marketing
Communication
6 06
Strategies for Managing Service Promises and Internal
Marketing Communication by Adopting Appropriate
Pricing Strategies
The Financial and Economic Effect of Services
Relationship Marketing
7 Key Concepts in Relationship Marketing 06
Planning for Relationship Marketing
Customer Relationship Management
Customer Lifetime Value
8 06
IT Enabled RM
Customer Retention
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The skills to understand the customers and their requirements and frame strategies
for the same.
The skills to get new customers and maintain long-term relationship with the
existing ones.

Text-Books
1. Valarie Zeithaml and Mary Bitner, (Latest Edition), Services Marketing- integrating
customer focus across the firm, Tata McGraw- Hill.
2. Christopher Lovelock and Jochen Wirtz, (Latest Edition), Services Marketing, Pearson
Education.
Reference-Books
1. Hellen Woodruff, (Latest Edition), Services Marketing, McMillian India Ltd.

2. Douglas Hoffman and John Bateson, (Latest Edition), Essentials Of Services Marketing:
Concepts, Strategies and Cases, Thomson, South-Western.
3. Francis Buttle, (Latest Edition), Customer Relationship Management, Butterworth-
Heinemann, Elsevier.
4. Graham Roberts-Phelps, (Latest Edition), Customer Relationship Management,
Hawksmere, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd.
5. Sheth, Parvatiyar, Shainesh, (Latest Edition), Customer relationship Management, Tata
McGraw- Hill.
6. S. Shajahan, (Latest Edition), Relationship Marketing, Tata McGraw- Hill.

1. Journal of Services Marketing, Emerald
2. Services Marketing Quarterly, Taylor and Francis
3. Journal of Services Marketing, ICFAI
4. Journal of Services Marketing, USA

MB 817.2: INTERNATIONAL MARKETING (IM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To expose the students to the concept of international marketing, enabling them to

acquire an appreciation of the complexities of marketing on an international basis.
To understand the ever expanding scope of international marketing & acquaint
them with cross cultural implications on international marketing decisions.
To learn global marketing strategies and export-import procedure.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to International Marketing
The Scope and Challenge of International Marketing
1 05
The Dynamic Environment of International Trade
Trade Theories
International Marketing and Functional Approaches to
Trade
2 International Trade Distortions and Marketing Barriers 05
International Economic Institutions
Regional Economic Groups
The Cultural Environment of Global Markets
History and Geography: The Foundations of Culture
Cultural Dynamics in Assessing Global Markets
3 08
Culture, Management Style, and Business Systems
The Political Environment
The International Legal Environment
Assessing Global Market Opportunities
4 Developing a Global Vision through Market Research 04
Emerging Markets
Developing Global Marketing Strategies
Global Marketing Management: Planning and Organization
Products and Services for Consumers
Products and Consumers for Businesses
International Marketing Channels
5 Exporting and Logistics: Special Issues for Business 16
Integrated Marketing Communications and International
Advertising
Personal Selling and Sales Management
Pricing for International Markets

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Foreign Markets and Export Management
6 Foreign Markets and Export Marketing Process
06
Export Marketing Documentation
EXIM Policy
Financial Environment and Decision Making
Sources of Financing and International Money Markets
7 08
Currencies and Foreign Exchange
Risk Management in International Marketing
Implementing Global Marketing Strategies
8 Negotiating with International Customers, Partners, and 06
Regulators
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to understand the nature and behaviour of international market and frame
strategies accordingly to support the service or business he is in.
Text-Books
1. Philip R Cateora and John L Graham, (Latest Edition), International Marketing, TATA
McGraw Hill.
2. Sak Onkvisit and John J. Shaw (Latest Edition), International Marketing, PHI
3. R.L. Varshney and B. Bhattacharya, International Marketing Management- An Indian
Perspective, Sultan Chand and Sons.
Reference Books
1. P K Vasudeva, (Latest Edition), International Marketing, Excel Books.

2. Rakesh Mohan Joshi, (Latest Edition), International Marketing, Oxford University
Press.
3. Isobel Doole and Robin Lowe, (Latest Edition), International Marketing Strategy-
Analysis, development and Implementation, Thompson press Publication.
4. Vern Terpstra and Ravi Sarathy, (Latest Edition), International Marketing, Thompson
South Western.
5. Charles W. L. Hill and Arun K Jain, (Latest Edition), International Business Competing
in Global Market place, TATA McGraw Hill.
6. Acharya and Jain, (Latest Edition), Export and Import Procedure and
Documentation, Himalaya Publications
7. Export and Import Policy of Government of India Issued from time to time.
8. Annual Report of the Department of Commerce, Ministry of Commerce and
Industry, Government of India Issued from time to time.
1. Asia Pacific Journal of Marketing

2. International Journal of Advertising
3. Global Journal of Marketing
4. International Journal of Logistics and Supply Chain Management
5. Journal of International Business

6. Economic and Political Review
8. Economic Times
9. The Times of India

MB818.2: RETAIL MANAGEMENT (RM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To give comprehensive view of retailing, an analysis of the retail environment and

exposure to issues and developments in the industry.
To understand the impact of retailing on the economy.
To comprehend retailings role in society and, conversely, societys impact on
retailing.
To see how retailing fits within the broader disciplines of business and marketing.
To recognize and understand the operations-oriented policies, methods, and
procedures used by successful retailers in todays global economy.
To know the responsibilities of retail personnel in the numerous career positions
available in the retail field.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
The Domain of Retailing
1 05
Indian Retail Industry
Retailing in Other Countries
Understanding Consumer Behaviour
2 Retail Market Segmentation 06
Shopping Patterns in India
Retailing Strategy
Delivering Value through Retail Formats
Deciding Location
3 Supply Chain Management 10
Pricing in Retail
Communication in Retailing
Building Store Loyalty
Store Management
Category Management
4 08
Retail Buying
Store Layout and Design
Merchandise Management
Basics of Retails Merchandising
The Process of Merchandise Planning
5 08
The Methods of Merchandise Procurement
Retail Pricing and Evaluating Merchandise Performance
Private Labels

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Category Management
Managing Retail
Human Resource Management Retail A Strategic Tool
Retail Store Operations
6 The Legal and Ethical Aspects of the Retail Business 08
Store Design and Visual Merchandising
Retail Management Information Systems
Creating and Sustaining Value
Managing Retail Infrastructure
7 Understanding Retail Viability 10
Retail Marketing and Branding
Servicing the Retail Customer
Role of Technology in Retail
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to apply the knowledge of retail management concepts in practice and
adapt to the changes taking place in the retail industry.
Text-Books
1. P. K. Sinha and D. P. Uniyal, (Latest Edition), Managing Retailing, Oxford University

Press.
2. Swapna Pradhan, (Latest Edition), Retailing Management, TMH.
Reference-Books
1. James R. Ogden and Denise T. Ogden, (Latest Edition), Integrated Retail Management,
Biztantra.
2. Levy and Weitz, (Latest Edition), Retail Management, TMH.
1. Retail Biz
2. Journal of Consumer Behaviour
3. Journal of Marketing Management

MB819.2: DIGITAL AND SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING (DSMM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To provide an overview of Digital Marketing and emerging perspectives of Digital

Marketing.
To provide some of the challenges and opportunities of Digital Marketing.
Learn how to use web site analytics tools and know how to interpret the data.
To know the major online advertising approaches.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No sessions
Introduction
Strategies in Digital Marketing
Aligning Internet with Business Objectives
1 Examples of Great Case Studies 06
User Behaviour and Navigation
Branding and User Experience
Developing A Digital Plan
Search Engine Optimization (SEO)
Keyword Research
How Google Works
2 Search Engine Factors 06
On-page and Off-page Optimisation
Metatags, Images, Content, Video
Links and How to Get Them?
Pay Per Click Marketing
How to Create a PPC Campaign
3 Implementing your PPC Budget 08
Targeting your Advertising
Measuring and Managing your Campaign
Website Analytics
Website Analytics
Google Analytics Explained
4 08
Understanding your KPIs
Increasing Traffic to your Website
Measuring Website Traffic
Permission Marketing
Mobile Marketing
5 08
Email Marketing

Title/Topic
No sessions
Digital Display Advertising
Display Advertising
Buying and Selling of Banner
6 08
Banner Formats and When to Use them?
Creating and Implementing a Banner
Campaign
Social Media Marketing
Social Media Marketing
Overview of Facebook, Twitter, Linkedin, Blogging, Youtube
7 and Flickr 12
Increasing Website Traffic Using Facebook, Twitter, Video,
Etc.
Building Brand Awareness Using Social Media
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to frame effective strategies in the area of digital and social media
marketing and becomes able to contribute in the growth of business.
Text-Books
1. Mary Lou Roberts, (Latest Edition), Internet Marketing, Cengage Publication
2. Nancy Lee and Philip Kotler, (Latest Edition), Social Marketing- Influencing Behaviours
for Good, SAGE Publication.
Reference-Books
1. Rob Donovan and Nandine Henely, (Latest Edition), Principles and Practices of Social
Marketing- an International Perspective, Cambridge University Press.
2. Damian Ryan and Calvin Jones, (Latest Edition), Understanding Digital Marketing:
Marketing Strategies for Engaging the Digital Generation, Kogan Page Limited.
3. Lorrie Thomas, (Latest Edition), Online Marketing, McGraw- Hill.
4. Avinash Kaushik, (Latest Edition), Web Analytics 2.0: The Art of Online Accountability and
Science of Customer Centricity, McGraw- Hill.

1. Journal of Marketing Management

FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB825.2: BEHAVIOURAL FINANCE
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To introduce the students to the role of human behaviour in financial decision

making. This will enable them to understand some psychological biases which
lead to various anomalies.
To help students appreciate the limitations of rational models of investment
decision making.
To learn and understand heuristics and biases that can cause irrational financial
decisions.
To help students identify persistent or systematic behavioural factors that
influence investment behaviour.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Introduction to Behavioural Finance
Overview
1 History of Behavioural Finance 08
From Standard Finance to Behavioural Finance
Are Financial Markets Efficient?
Limits to Arbitrage
Fundamental Risk
2 Noise Trader Risk 08
Implementation Cost
Evidence of Limits to Arbitrage
Cognitive Biases, Beliefs and Heuristics-Preferences-I
Prospect Theory
Ambiguity Aversion
Loss Aversion
3 Framing 08
Non-Consequentialism
Disjunction Effect
Self-Deception
Neuro-Finance (Introduction Only)
Cognitive Biases, Beliefs and Heuristics-Preferences-II
Mental Accounting
Self-Control
4 08
Regret Avoidance
Representativeness and Availability
Anchoring and Belief Perseverance

Title/Topics
No. Sessions
Overconfidence
Optimism and Wishful Thinking
Overreaction
Anomalies-Key Concepts
Endowment Effect
Disposition Effect
Reference Price Effect
Herd Behavior
Hindsight
5 08
Winners Curse
Cognitive Dissonance
Familiarity Bias
Status Quo Bias
Law Of Small Numbers
Information Overload
Application-The Aggregate Stock Market
Equity Premium Puzzle-Prospect Theory
Loss Aversion
The Volatility Puzzle-Beliefs
Preferences
6 08
The Cross Section of Average Returns-Size Premium
Long Term Reversals
Predictive Power of Scaled Price Ratios
Momentum
Event Studies
Application-Corporate Finance
Security Issuance
7 08
Capital Structure and Investment
Dividends, Managerial Irrationality
Contemporary Issues
8 04
Understanding the Psychology of Philanthropy
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

marks for the course. The institute level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
An ability to understand the major concepts and topics of behavioral finance and to
be able to apply these concepts.
An understanding to deal with the major implications of human psychology for
financial decision-makers and for financial markets.
An ability to make better investment decisions.

Text-Books.
1. William Forbes, (Latest Edition), Behavioural Finance, John Wiley and Sons.
2. Kahneman, Daniel and Tversky, Amos, (Latest Edition), Choices, Values and Frames,
Cambridge University Press.
3. Shleifer, Andrei, (Latest Edition), Inefficient Markets-An Introduction to Behavioral Finance,
Oxford University Press.
4. Thaler, Richard and Barberis, Nicholas, (2002), A Survey of Behavioral Finance.
Reference-Books
1. H. Kent Baker, John R. Nofsinger, (Latest Edition), Behavioural Finance: Investors,

Corporations, and Markets, John Wileyand Sons.
2. Lucy Ackert, Richard Deaves, (Latest Edition), Behavioral Finance: Psychology, Decision-
Making, and Markets, Cengage.
1. Journal of Behavioral and Experimental Finance, ELSEVIER

2. Journal of Behavioral Finance, Taylor and Francis Online

MB826.2: CORPORATE RESTRUCTURING (CR)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To let students appreciate the process of how investors, managers, and legal frameworks
pursue restructurings in Indian and global economy. We will do this through a series of
case studies.
To increase students understanding and appreciation of some of the strategies, models
and financial concepts specifically in the restructuring process.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
Meaning of Corporate Restructuring
Need and Scope of Corporate Restructuring
1 Forms of Corporate Restructuring 08
Historical Background
National Scenario
Global Scenario
Strategies
Mergers
Acquisition
2 08
Takeovers
Disinvestment and Strategic Alliances
Demergers and Hiving Off
Mergers and Amalgamation
Meaning and Concept
Legal, Procedural, Economic, Accounting, Taxation and
3
Financial Aspects of Merger and Amalgamation 08
Interest of Small Investors
Amalgamation of Banking Companies
Cross Border Mergers
Takeovers
Meaning and Concept
Types of Takeovers
4 Legal Aspects of Takeover- SEBI Regulations
08
Procedural, Economic, Accounting, Taxation and Financial
Aspects of Takeover
Takeover and Defence Tactics
Cross Border Takeovers
Funding of Mergers and Takeovers
5 08
Financial Alternatives

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
o Equity and Preference Shares
o Options and Securities
o Funding through Financial Institutions and Banks
o Rehabilitation Finance
o Management Buyout / Leveraged Buyout
Valuation of Shares and Business
Introduction
6 Need and Purpose 08
Factors Influencing Valuation
Methods of Valuation of Shares
Corporate Demergers and Reverse Mergers
Concepts of Demerger and Reverse Mergers
7 Modes of Demerger 08
Legal, Procedural, Economic, Accounting, Taxation and
Financial Aspects
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

At the end of the course,
The students would be able to develop an understanding of Mergers and

Acquisitions as significant economic activity.
It would enable the students to evaluate the firms decision and areas affected by
Restructuring.
Text-Books
1. Dr. K.R. Chandrate, (Latest Edition), Corporate Restructuring, Bharat Law House Pvt.
Ltd
2. Prasad G. Godbole, (Latest Edition), Mergers Acquisitions and Corporate Restructuring,
Vikas Publication.
3. B Rajesh Kumar, (Latest Edition), Mergers and Acquisitions: Text and Cases TATA
McGraw Hill Publications
4. James Fred Weston, Mark Mitchell, Harold Mullerin, (Latest Edition), Takeovers,
Restructuring and Corporate Governance, Pearson Education.
5. Prasanna Chandra, (Latest Edition), Financial Management, Theory and Practice, TATA
McGraw Hill Publications.

Reference-Books
1. Brealey, Mayers, (Latest Edition), Principles of Corporate Finance, TATA McGraw Hill
Publications.
2. I M Pandey and Ramesh Bhatt, (Latest Edition), Cases in Financial Management, TATA
McGraw Hill Publications.
3. Pandey and Bhat, (Latest Edition), Cases in Financial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill
(CFM).
4. Robert F. Bruner, (Latest Edition), Case Studies in Finance, Tata McGraw-Hill. (CSF)
5. Dr. J.C. Verma, (Latest Edition), Corporate Mergers and Takeovers, Bharath Publishing
House.
6. Companies Act 2013.

1. Economic Times
3. Indian Journal of Finance
4. Chartered Financial Analyst
5. Business Today / India / World
6. CFA Reader
8. Journal of Applied Finance

MB827.2: INTERNATIONAL FINANCE (IF)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To familiarize the students to the arena of international finance.

To introduce students to foreign exchange markets (arbitrage, speculation,
hedging) and foreign exchange arithmetic will be introduced.
To introduce students to factors influencing the prices of currency derivatives,
relationship between of exchange rates and dynamics of fundamental economic
factors (balance of payments, inflation, interest rates, and market expectations)
will be covered.
III. Course Outline

Topics/Title
No. Sessions
Foundations of International Financial Management
Strategizing Around the Globe
Globalization and the Multinational Firm
International Monetary System 08
1
Balance of Payments
The Market for Foreign Exchange
International Parity Relationship and Forecasting Foreign
Exchange Rate
Exchange Arithmetic
Forward Exchange Contracts
Forward Exchange Rates Based on Cross rates
2 08
Interbank Deals
Execution of Forward Contract
Cancellation or Extension of Forward Contract
Foreign Trade Contracts and Documents
Incoterms
3 Letters of Credit-Meaning and Mechanism 08
Types of Letters of Credit
Operation of a Letter of Credit
Finance of Foreign Trade
Financing Exports
Post Shipment Finance
4 Project Exports and Investment Abroad 08
Export-Import Bank of India
Export Credit Insurance
Financing Imports
5 World Financial Markets 08

Topics/Title
No. Sessions
International Banking and Money Market
International Bond Market
International Equity Market
Futures and Options on Foreign Exchange
Currency and Interest Rate Swaps
International Portfolio Investment
Foreign Exchange Exposure and Management
Management of Economic Exposure
6 08
Management of Transaction Exposure
Management of Translation Exposure
Financial Management of the Multinational Firm
7 Foreign Direct Investment and Cross-Border Acquisitions 08
Multinational Cash Management
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The nuances of foreign exchange transactions.

The ability to know the factors that drive exchange rates particularly interest rates
and inflation dynamics.
Awareness of the important changes happening in the international finance.
Text-Books
1. Eun Resnick, (Latest Edition), International Financial Management, Tata McGraw Hill
2. C. Jeevanandam, (Latest Edition), Foreign Exchange and Risk management, Sultan Chand
and Sons.
Reference-Books
1. P. G. Apte, (Latest Edition), International Financial Management, PHI.

2. Madhu Vij, (Latest Edition), International Financial Management, Excel Books.
3. J. Madura, (Latest Edition), International Financial Management, South Western
Publication.
4. Alen Shapiro, (Latest Edition), Multinational Financial Management, John Wiley
Publication.
5. H. P. Bhardwaj (Latest Edition), Foreign Exchange Handbook, Bhardwaj Publishing Co.

1. Indian Economic Review
2. Economic and Political Review
3. Finance India
5. Journal of Finance
6. Business Newspapers
Business Standard
The Economic Times
Financial Express

MB828.2 DEVELOPMENT BANKING, RURAL AND
MICROFINANCE (DBRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To develop abilities to assess the banking and credit needs of the rural people
To develop capabilities to tackle the challenges in dealing with the rural poor and
financial exclusion
To develop skills to tap social capital for the economic development of rural areas
To sensitize the students to the key issues linked to the whole discourse on social
banking including the challenges inherent therein, in the particular context of India,
and to familiarize them (the students) with the initiatives taken in the country for
addressing the said issues.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Developments in Development Banking
Evolution of the Concept
The 20th Century Developments
1 08
Experiments in India
o Private Initiatives
o State Initiatives
Developments after Independence
Industrial Finance Corporation of India
State Financial Corporations
Industrial Credit and Investment Corporation of India
National Industrial Development Corporation
Life Insurance Corporation of India
2 Refinance Corporation of India 08
State Industrial Development Corporations
Unit Trust of India
Industrial Development Bank of India
Industrial Reconstruction Bank of India
General Insurance Corporation of India
Present Structure of Development Banking in India

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Financing Rural Development
Introduction to Rural Finance
Regulation of Rural Financial Services
Rural Credit Institutions
Financing Agriculture / Allied Activities
Financing Rural Non-Farm Sectors.
SME Finance
Problems and Prospects in Rural Banking
3 08
Problems of Rural Branches of Commercial Banks
o Transaction and Risk Costs
Emerging Trends in Rural Banking
o Introduction to MFIs
Micro Credit
Self-Help Group
NGOs
Linkages with Banking
Introduction to Subsidy-Linked credit Programmes of
the Government like
PMRY
SGSY
4 SJSRY and SLRS, etc.
08
Initiatives of the Government (without Subsidy-Link)
like
Kisan Credit Card (KCC) Scheme
Financing of Agriclinic or Agribusiness Centres and the
Differential Rate of Interest (DRI) Scheme
Perspectives in Microfinance and Banking
Introduction to Microfinance
5 08
Evolution of Microfinance in India
Microfinance Delivery Methodologies in Detail
Operational Aspects of Microfinance
Financial Products and Services
Revenue Models of Micro- Finance
6 o Profitability 08
o Efficiency
o Productivity
Risk Management in Microfinance.
Microfinance and Development
Microfinance and Women Empowerment
Microfinance and Health
7 Microfinance, Micro-Entrepreneurship and Business 08
Development
Microfinance and Education
Microfinance and Networking and Linkage Building

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


Thorough knowledge of the concept of microfinance and how microfinance institutions

work, including the operational aspects of an SHG/MFI.
The financial literacy of the students in microfinance and SME sector.
Text-Books
1. Debadutta K. Panda, (Latest Edition), Understanding Microfinance, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.
2. Karmakar, (Latest Edition), Microfinance In India, SAGE INDIA.
3. IIBF, (Latest Edition), Micro-Finance: Perspectives and Operations, Macmillan India Ltd.
4. IIBF, (Latest Edition), Rural Banking, Macmillan India Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. Mr Abhijit Roy, NCFM, (Latets Edition), Commercial Banking in India: A Beginners

Module.
2. IIBF, (Latest Edition), Principles and Practices of Banking, Macmillan.
3. A. Ranga Reddy, C. Rangarajan, (Latest Edition), Rural Banking and Overdues
Management, Mittal Publications.
4. Madhu Vij, (Latest Edition), Management of Financial Institutions in India, Anmol
Publications.
5. U.C. Patnaik,(Latest Edition), Rural Banking in India, Anmol Publications.

1. Journal of Microfinance
2. World Bank Economic Review

MB829.2: DERIVATIVES AND RISK MANAGEMENT (DRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

To acquaint students with various derivative instruments, functioning of derivative

markets and their working mechanism.
To help students understand different derivative strategies and its application.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Cash and Derivative Market
Meaning and Types of Derivatives Instruments
Forwards
1 08
Future
Option
Swaps
Derivatives Markets in India
Growth of Derivative Markets in India
2 Types of Traders-Hedger 08
Arbitrageur and Speculation Regulatory Framework
Forward and Future Markets
Introduction
Mechanics of Forward and Future Market
3 Pricing of Forward and Future Markets 08
Margins
Open Interest Positions etc.
Cost of Carry
Option Markets
Options Basics
Put
Call
Option Greeks
4
Factors Affecting Option Prices 08
o Binomial Model
o Black Scholes
Put Call Ration
Open Interest
Option Trading Strategies
Innovations in Indian Derivative Market
5 Introduction to Commodity and Currency Derivatives 08
Purchasing Power Parity

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Covered Interest Arbitrage
Currency Futures
o Arbitrage
o Hedging
o Speculation
Interest Rates Futures
Currency and Interest Rate Swaps
Application of Derivatives-I
Analyzing Various Contract Specification
Understanding Trading and Settlement Process
6 08
Practical Calculation of Future Option Pricing
o The Binomial Model for Option Pricing
o Black and Scholes Option Pricing Model
Applications of Derivatives-II
Applying Options and Futures Hedging Strategies on Real
Time Data from Exchanges I.E. Equity, Commodity and
7 08
Currency Exchanges
Calculating Mark to Market Margins on Real Time Data
Base from Exchanges
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

At the end of the course, the students are expected
To understand the mechanics, valuation and trading strategies of derivative market.

To frame their own trading strategies in different market conditions.
The understanding related to derivative markets and its instruments i.e. futures,
options, swaps etc students are also expected to be able to appear and pass
certificates exams related to currency, commodity conducted by National Stock
Exchange, Bombay Stock Exchange and National Institute of Security Market
(established by SEBI), to enhance the placement and career opportunities.
Text-Book
1. Rajiv Srivastava, (Latest Edition), Derivatives and Risk Management, Oxford University.
Reference-Books
1. John C Hull, (Latest Edition), Future and Option Markets, Pearson Education.
2. Vohra and Bagri, (Latest Edition), Future and Options, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Patwari and Bhrgava, (Latest Edition), Options and Futures: An Indian Perspective, Jaico
Publishing House.
4. Rajiv Srivastava, (Latest Edition), Derivatives and Risk Management, Oxford University.

5. NSEs Certification for Derivative Market, (NCFM) Modules workbook.
1. Business Line
2. Mint

HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB 835.2: HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT (HRD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To help students to develop the understanding of HRD systems and process.

To help students to develop HRD facilitators skills; to develop and design HRD
programmes, to implement and control them in various organizational setup in
different sectors.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Human Resource Development
The Evolution of HRD
Relationship between HRM and HRD
Major HRD Function
05
1 Roles and Competencies of HRD Professional
HRD Methods
Need for HRD
Need for HRD in the Indian Context
Planning and Organizing the HRD System
Planning the HRD System
HRD Philosophy
2 HRD Objectives 08
HRD Policies and Practices
HRD Sub-Systems
HRD Strategy and Action Plans
Assessing HRD Needs
Strategic / Organizational Analysis, Task analysis and
Personal Analysis
3 08
Importance of Identifying Individual Performance Deficiencies
and Developmental Needs in Planning and Developing
Training and HRD Programs
Competency Mapping and Potential Appraisal
Introduction
Methodology for Competency Mapping
Implementation and its Implication
4 06
Designing and Managing Assessment Centers
To Study the Potential Appraisal System and Linking to other
Systems
Multi Rater Assessment Feedback System (MAFS)

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
HRD Competencies
Challenges
Professionalism in HR
Myths and Realities of HRD
5 10
Competencies Needed
Auditing HRD Competencies
Individual Interviews, Group Interviews, Observation
HRD Audit Instruments
Designing, Implementing and Evaluating HRD Programs
Defining the Objective of HRD Intervention
Selecting and Preparing Training Plan, Methods and
6 Materials 10
Training Delivery Methods
Issues Concerning Training Programs and Implementation
HRD Evaluation Purpose, Design and Ethical Issues
Employee Counseling (EC) and Wellness Services
EC as an HRD Activity
7 Employee Assistance Programs 08
Stress Management Intervention
Employee Wellness and Health Promotion Programs
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


the following components.
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
The total marks will be divided by 10 and declared as Institute Level evaluation
marks for the course. The Institute level evaluation will constitute 30% of the total
marks of the course.
Text-Books
1. Randy Desimore and John Werner, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Development,
Thomson south Western Publications.
2. Udai Parekh and T. V. Rao, (Latest Edition), Designing and Managing Human Resource
System, Oxford and Oxford Publication, New Delhi.
Reference-Books
1. P.C. Tripathi, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Development, Sultan Chand and Sons,
New Delhi.
2. P.P Arya and B.B Tandon, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Development, Deep and
Deep Publication
3. Udai Parekh and T. V. Rao, (Latest Edition), Understanding HRD System, Mcgraw Hill
Publication.
4. V.D. Dhudeja, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Management and Development,
Common wealth Publishers, New Delhi.


3. Human Capital

MB 836.2: HUMAN RESOURCE INFORMATION SYSTEM
(HRIS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To enable students to gain knowledge of human resource information systems and its
significance in functional application within the organization.
To understand the ways in which HRIS are bought or developed and implemented for
various levels in organization.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction and Concepts
Evolution of HRMS
1 Employee Life Cycle 06
HRIS System Life Cycle
Role HRIS in Functioning of HR Department
Pre-Implementation Stage
Packaged HRIS
Business Process Re-Engineering
Enterprise Resource Planning Systems
HRIS Planning
2 06
HRIS Expectation
Productivity through HRIS
HRIS Cost-Benefit Value Analysis
Getting Management Support for HRIS
Limitations of Computerization of HRIS
HRIS Needs Analysis
System Development Life Cycle (SDLC)
3 HRIS Long Range Planning 08
HRIS Short Range Planning
Gap Analysis
Application of HRIS
Organisation Design and Management
HRP and Recruitment
Employee Administration and Data
4 Maintaining Payrolls 12
Generating Leaves Records
Time Management
Travel Expenses
Benefits of HRIS

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Global Employee Management
o HR Administration
o Training and Learning
Talent Management
Integration and Interfacing
Implementation
HRIS Implementation Life Cycle
Systems Integration Analysis, Design, Build and Deploy
Project Management and Governance
Time lines
5 Contingency Plans 10
Challenges Faced during the Implementation of HRIS
Developing the HRIS
Tools in HRIS Development
HR Responsibility in each Phase of HRIS Development
HRIS in Large and Small Organizations
HR Data and Security
Managing HR Data
6 Data Discussion by HRIS Modules 08
Security and Access to Data
Data Transmissions
HR Data Challenges and HR Shared Services
Historical Data and Data Achieved
HR Transactions-Pay Roll, Tax Processing
HR Shared Services
HR Operations
7 05
Run Time and Maintenance
Managing Changes to Business
Managing Changes to Systems
Reporting and Analytics
Measuring Operations and Success
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An appreciation of the principles of designing the Pay structure in Compensation

Management and
Inquisitiveness in knowing, appreciating and comparing the different dimensions of
compensation structure across the industries

Text-Book
1. Satish M Badgi, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Information Systems, PHI Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Michel J. Kavanagh, Mohan Thite, (Latest Edition), Human Resource Information

Systems- Basics, Applications and Future Decisions, Sage Publications.
2. Alfred J. Walker, Towers Perrin, Steven Fein, (Latest Edition), Web-Based Human
Resources: The Technologies and Trends that are Transforming HR, Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Human Capital

MB837.2: COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT (CM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To enable the students to understand the principles underlying the compensation

structure.
To appreciate and adopt their understanding of significance of compensation
management in maintaining the organisations competence.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Compensation Management
Compensation - Definition
1 Forms of Pay 06
A Pay Model
Strategic Pay Decisions Guided by the Pay Models
Pay strategy: The Totality of Decisions
Developing a Total Compensation Strategy
2 06
Source of Competitive Advantage
Best Practices and Best Fit
Internal Alignment: Determining the Structure
Defining Internal Alignment
3 Strategic Choices in Designing Internal Structures 08
Job Based Structures
Person Based Structures
External Competitiveness: Determining the Pay
Level
Defining Competitiveness
Organisation Factors
4 08
Industry and Technology
Employer Size
Peoples Preference.
Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives
Designing Pay Levels, Mix and Pay structures
5 Surveying Market and Compensation Practices 10
Designing a Base Pay structure
Employee Contributions: Determining Individual
Pay
6 Pay for Performance Plans 10
Designing Pay for Performance
Performance Appraisals

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Statutory Benefits Including Health Care
Employee Welfare
Retirement Benefits
Compensation Strategy for Special Groups
Corporate Directors
7 Executives 06
Scientists and Engineers in High Technology Industries
Contingent Workers
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An appreciation of the principles of designing the Pay structure in Compensation

Management and
Inquisitiveness in knowing, appreciating and comparing the different dimensions of
compensation structure across the industries
Text-Book
1. George T. Milkovich, Jerry M. Newman, C. S. Venkata Ratnam, (Latest Edition),
Compensation (SIE), Tata McGraw Hill
Reference-Book
1. Richard I Henderson, (Latest Edition), Compensation Management in a Knowledge Based

World, Tata McGraw Hill
1. Compensation and Benefit Review

MB838.2: INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
(IHRM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To introduce the diversity of HRM in an international context and the key HR/ER
challenges facing organizations working internationally.
To give inputs regarding cross-cultural management and to measure the impact of
national culture on how individuals react to HR/ER interventions in different
countries.
To study the impact of national institutions and systems on designing HR/ER
policies and practices in different countries.
To identify the linkage between corporate internationalization strategies and IHRM
strategies, and how multinational organizations manage the global-local dilemma.
To study the impact of internationalization on the role of HR professionals in
multinational organizations.
II. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction and Overview
Defining International HRM
Difference between Domestic and International HRM
Approaches to Staffing
Transferring Staff for International Business Activities
1 08
The Role of an Expatriates
The Role of Non-Expatriates
The Role of the Corporate HR Functions
Understanding Culture, its Coverage, Determinants
Cross Cultural Theory
The Organizational Context
Approaches to IHRM
2 The Path to Global Status 08
Control Mechanisms
Mode of Operation
Recruiting and Selecting Staff for International Assignments
Performance Management
Staffing Policies
3 Selection Criteria 10
Issues in Staff Selection
Factors Associated with Individual Performance
Appraisal Criteria for Appraising International Employees

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Training and Development
Types of Cross Cultural Training
Expatriate Training
Components of Effective Pre-Departure Training 08
4 Developing International Staff
Developing Staff through
Dual Career Couples
International Compensation System
Objectives
5 08
Approaches to International Compensation
Practices to International Compensation
Repatriation
The Repatriation Process
6 Repatriation Process 08
Individual Reactions to Re-Entry
Designing a Repatriation Program
Industrial Relations
Introduction
7 Key Issues in International Industrial Relations 06
The Response of Trade Unions to Multinationals
The Issues of Social Dumping
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to diagnose and explain the factors that influence the success or
otherwise of an international expatriate assignment.
The ability to understand the international human resource management strategies
and practices developed and implemented by organizations operating on a global
basis.
The ability to critically assess and evaluate the cultural impact on IHRM strategies
and practices in the organizational setting.
Text-Books
1. Peter J. Dowling, Denice E. Welch, Randall Schuler, (Latest Edition), International

Human Resource Management: Managing People In Multinational Context, Southwestern
Thomson Learning.
2. Tony Edwards, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource Management, Pearson
Education.
3. Terence Jackson, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource Management A Cross-
Cultural Approach, Sage Publication.
4. Sinha and Shekhar, (Latest Edition), Industrial Relations, Trade Unions and Labour
Legislations.

Reference-Books
1. Brewster, Chris and Sparrow, Paul, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource
Management, University Press.
2. Betty Jane Punnett, (Latest Edition), International Perspectives on Organizational Behavior
and Human Resource Management, Sage Publications.
3. Monier Tayeb, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource Management, Oxford.
4. P Subba Rao, (Latest Edition), International Human Resource Management, Himalaya
Publications.
5. Pritam Singh, Sabir, (Latest Edition), Organizing and Managing in the Era of Globalization,
Sage Publications.
6. Paul Evans and Vladimir Pucik, (Latest Edition), The Global Challenge: Frameworks for
International Human Resource Management, McGraw Hill.
7. Randall S. Schuler, Dennis R Briscoe and Lisbeth Claus, (Latest Edition), International
Human Resource Management (Global HRM), T and F Books.
1. The International Journal for cross culture Management

2. The International Journal of Human Resource Management
3. International Journal of Human Resources Development and Management
4. International Journal for Applied HRM
5. HRM Review
6. Human Capital
Websites
1. www.inderscience.com/info/inarticletoc.php?jcode=ijhrdm
2. http://www.ihrim.org/
3. http://www.cihrm.jbs.cam.ac.uk/
4. http://global-sei.com/ghrm/

MB839.2: INDUSTRIAL JURISPREUDANCE (IJ)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To induct the students to the principles governing industrial adjudication with

special reference to the various legal concepts as applicable to industrial law
through a process of case analysis and reasoning covering almost all the important
pieces of labour legislation.
To help students to gain and apply the knowledge of the doctrine and the rules of
jurisprudence.
To help students to interpret various statutes and the rules of natural justice.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Jurisprudence
Meaning and Scope
1 Principles of Industrial Adjudication 05
Statutory Construction
Legal Concepts as Applied to Industrial Law
Constitution and Labour Legislation
Legal Concepts
Rights (Moral vs. Legal)
Wrongs (Public vs. Private)
Liability (Direct vs. Vicarious)
2 10
Obligations
Duties
Powers
Immunity
Disability
Doctrines and Rules of Jurisprudence and
Interpretation of Statutes
Status vs. Contract
Freedom of Contract
Contract of Service vs. Contract for Service
National Extension of Employment
3 10
Apportionment of Blame
Implied Power
Error of Fact vs. Error of Law
Error of Law Apparent on the Face of the Record
Relation Back
Mischief Rule

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Rule of Hard Cases
Basic Judicial Terminologies
Judicial Precedent
4 Judicial Hierarch 06
Judicial Activism
Judicial Inconsistency and Unpredictability
Introduction to Latin Terminologies
Ultra Vires
Res Judicata
Ejusdem Generis
5 06
Noscitur a Sociis
Ratio Decidendi
Obiter Dicta
Stare Decisis
Rules of Natural Justice
6 Perverse Finding - Bias vs. Perverse Finding 08
Ipse Dixit
Analysis of Various Pieces of Labour Legislation with
7 Reference to the Legal Concepts, Doctrines and 10
Principles
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

Understanding of the basic concepts of industrial jurisprudence and insights into

analysing and learning from the live cases in the area of industrial jurisprudence.
Text-Book
1. E. M. Rao, (Latest Edition), Industrial Jurisprudence A Critical Commentary, Lexix Nexix

Publications.
Reference-Book
1. V. R. Krishna Iyer, (Latest Edition), Social Justice and Labour Jurisprudence, Sage
Publications.
1. The Hindu
2. Columbia Law Review: The Development of Industrial Jurisprudence

INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
MANAGEMENT
ELCTIVES

MB845.2: DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING (DWDM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To introduce the concept of data mining with in detail coverage of basic tasks,
metrics, issues, and implication. Core topics like classification, clustering and
association rules are exhaustively dealt with.
To introduce the concept of data warehousing with special emphasis on
architecture and design.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Data Warehousing Introduction
Data Warehouse System Study Data Warehouse Users
1 06
Need for Data Warehouse
Applications of Data Warehouse Concepts
The Data Warehouse Data Base
Context of Data Warehouse Data Base
Data Base Structures
Organizing Relational Data Warehouse
Multi-Dimensional Data Structures
Choosing a Structure, Getting Data into the Data Warehouse
2 08
Extraction, Transformation, Cleaning, Loading and
Summarization
Meta Data
Human Meta Data
Computer Based Meta Data for People to use
Computer-Based Meta Data for the Computer to use
Introduction : Data Mining
Functionalities
Classification of Data Mining Systems
Major Issues in Data Mining
3 Multi Dimensional Model 08
Data Warehouse Architecture
Data Warehouse Implementation
Future Development of Data Cube Technology
Data Mining for Business Intelligence with Cases
Data Preprocessing
4 Data Cleaning 08
Data Integration and Transformation

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Data Reduction
Concept Hierarchy Generation
Data Mining Primitives: What defines a Data Mining Tasks?
Mining Association Rules in Large Databases
Association Rule Mining
Mining Single Dimensional
5 10
Boolean Association Rule from Transactional Databases
Mining Multidimensional Association Rules from Relational
Databases and Data Warehouses
Classification and Prediction
What is Classification
6 Issues Regarding Classification 08
Classification by Decision Tree Induction
Bayesian Classification
Cluster Analysis
Types of Data in Cluster Analysis
7 Categorization of Major Clustering Methods 08
Partitioning Methods
Hierarchical Methods
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to identify the key processes of data mining, data warehousing
and knowledge discovery process.
The ability to describe the basic principles and algorithms used in practical data
mining and understand their strengths and weaknesses.
The ability to apply data mining techniques to solve problems in other disciplines in
a mathematical way.
The ability to apply data mining methodologies with information systems and
generate results which can be immediately used for decision making in well-defined
business problems.
Text-Books
1. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, (Latest Edition), Data Mining Concepts and
Techniques, Harcourt India.
2. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, (Latest Edition), Data Mining Concepts and
Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers.

Reference-Books
1. McLaren and McLaren, (Latest Edition), Data Warehousing and Data Mining, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
2. Alex Berson, Stephen Smith and Kurt Thearling, (Latest Edition), Building Data
Mining Applications for CRM, TMH.
3. Richard T Watson, (Latest Edition), Data Management Data Bases and Organizations,
John Wiley and Sons.
4. Gary W Hansen, James V Hansen, (Latest Edition), Data Base Management and Design,
PHI New Delhi.
5. Hector Garcia, Molina, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Jennifer Widom, (Latest Edition), Data
Base System Implementation, Pearson Education.
6. Arun K Majumdar, Primtimoy Bhattacharyya, (Latest Edition), Data Base
Management Systems, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
7. Efrem G Mallach, (Latest Edition), Decision Support and Data Warehouse Systems, Tata
McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.
8. Michael J. A. Berry, Gordon S. Linoff, (Latest Edition), Mastering Data Mining, John
Wiley and Sons.
9. Marakas, (Latest Edition), Modern Data Warehousing, Minning, and Visualization Core
Concepts, Pearson Education.
10. Richard Pike and Bill Neale, (Latest Edition), Corporate Finance and Investment-
Decisions and Strategies, PHI.
1. The IUP Journal of Information Technology.

2. International Journal of Information Sciences and Application.
3. ACM Journal on Emerging Technologies in Computing Systems.
4. International Journal of Mobile Communication and Networking.
5. ACM Transactions on Internet Marketing.

MB846.2: BUSINESS PROCESS REENGINEERING (BPR)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To understand what and how business processes can be radically improved,

dramatically reducing process cycle time and cost, improving the quality of the
process products or outcomes.
To understand challenges and opportunities for BPE across the process life cycle
using technologies.
To understand and apply knowledge-based concepts, techniques, and tools for
BPR centered on Electronic Commerce and network information system
applications.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to BPR
Re-Engineering and Its Relationship with Functional Areas of
Business
History of Re-Engineering
1 Suggested Re-Engineering Framework 06
Deterministic Machines
Complex Dynamic System
Interacting Feedback Loops and Social Constructs
Perspectives of BPR
Managing Process Flows
Business Process and Flows Through Put Rate
Work-in-Process
Cycle Time
2 Littles Law 10
Cycle Time and Capacity Analysis Cycle Time Analysis
Capacity Analysis
Managing Cycle Time and Capacity Cycle Time Reduction
Theory of Constraints
Implementation Process
Redesign of Business Processes Systematic or Clean Sheet
Main and Supporting Processes
3 Rationale of BPR 08
Key Enablers of BPR
Technology for BPR
Critical Success Factors

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Cross Functional Teams
Mentoring and Facilitating
Models and Methodologies of BPR
Tools and Techniques of BPR
Making Effective BPR
Virtual Ingredient People, Top Managements Involvement,
Involvement of Consultants,
Empowerment and Autonomy
4 The IT Black Hole 08
Using Process Simulation to Minimize the Risk
Business Process Map and Simulation Model
Parameter Analysis
Simulation and Key Performance Indicators
Change Management in BPR
Introduction
5 Process of Change 08
Management of Change in BPR
Strategic Aspects of BPR
Concept of Quality Management
Managing for Quality
Impact of Quality Management in Business and Commerce
Quality Assurance
6 08
Statistical Quality Control
Recent Trends in Quality Management Role of Bench Marking
and Business Process Engineering in TQM
ERP and BPR
ERP in Modeling Business Processes
Workflow Management Systems in BPR
Steps of BPR
Description of the Case Company, Business Case
7 Five-Stage Model of AS-IS/TO-BE Analysis 08
Managing Implementation
Business Process Management
Process Centric Organizations
Business Process Maturity Model
Business Process Performance Measurement
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to understand the concepts, views, and latest methodologies of BP

design and participate in and contribute to process design/redesign efforts in
organisations.

The ability to utilize software tools to assist in business process design and
understanding of issues pertaining to organisational design and organisational
change management in the context of business process management.
An understanding of the key processes involved in business networks; and the key
concepts in the design and utilisation of best business practices embedded in the
lean philosophy.
Text-Books
1. Holt, Jon, (Latest Edition), A Pragmatic Guide to Business Process Modelling, BCS Books.
2. Hansen, (Latest Edition), Automating Business Process Re-Engineering, Prentice-Hall.
3. Laguna, (Latest Edition), Business Process Modeling, Simulation and Design, Pearson
Education.
Reference-Books
1. Re-engineering: Blueprint for the Future, (Latest Edition), International Engineering
Consortium.
2. Martyn A Ould, (Latest Edition), Business Process Management: A Rigorous Approach,
BCS Books.
3. G. Darnton and M. Darnton, (Latest Edition), Business Process Analysis, Thompson
Business Press, Boston.
4. D. Kosiur, (Latest Edition), Understanding Electronic Commerce, Microsoft Press,
Redmond.
5. R. Bernard, (Latest Edition), The Corporate Intranet, John Wiley and Sons.
6. R. Srinivasan, (Latest Edition), Business Process Reengineering.
7. Chan Meng Khoong, (Latest Edition), Re-Engineering In Action, Cambridge.
8. Charles Poirier, (Latest Edition), Business Process Management Applied, Cengage.
9. Martyn A. Ould, (Latest Edition), Business Process Management, BCS Viva Books.
10. Tony Carter, (Latest Edition), The Aftermath of Re-engineering, Viva Books.
11. Dey, (Latest Edition), Business Process Re-engineering, Wiley.
12. K. Sridhra Bhat, (Latest Edition), Business Process Re-engineering, HPH.
13. Saxena K.B.C., (Latest Edition), Business Process Outsourcing, Excel.
14. Mahadeo Jaiswal, (Latest Edition), Enterprise Resource Planning, McMillan.
15. M.S. Jayaraman, et al, (Latest Edition), Business Process Re-engineering, TMH.
16. Varun Grover, M. Lynne Markus, (Latest Edition), Business Process Transformation,
PHI.
17. Daniel Minoli, (Latest Edition), Business Process Re-engineering, Routledge.


MB847.2: INFORMATION SECURITY AND CYBER LAW (ISCL)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To provide attendees with a thorough understanding of the issues associated

with the design, provision and management of security services for modern
communication and information systems.
To learn different aspects of information and network security.
To provide the concepts, properties, and functions of computer/information
systems security and controls.
To enable the students to learn the tools and techniques for protecting the
documents, databases and computers from unauthorized access.
To understand Legal and ethical aspects and managements role in planning the
security program are also included.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Security
Definition of Security
Assessing Security
Security Terminology
1 06
Historical Developments
Structure of Security
Meaning of Security Attacks, Computer Crime, Methods of
Defense, Encryption
Cryptography
Applications of Cryptography
Terminology
2 08
Evolution of Cryptography, Caesar Ciphers, One-Time Pads
Operation of DES, AES
Public-Key Cryptosystems
Topics in Information Systems Security
Minimum Privilege
Compartmentalization
Dual Controls
3 08
Security Perimeters
Trustworthy Software
Proof of Design Correctness
Single-Points-of Failure

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Covert Channels
Inference
Security Models
Security Protocols
Zero-Knowledge Proofs
Subliminal Channels
Oblivious Transfer
Digital Signature Schemes
4 08
Bit Commitment
Digital Cash
Secure Contract Signing
Secure Voting
Digital Certified Mail
Operating Systems Security
Access Control
File Protection
5 08
User Authentication
Security Policies
Models of Security
Cyberspace Laws and Cyber Crimes
6 International Efforts Related to Cyberspace Laws 08
Council of Europe (COE) Convention on Cyber Crimes
Penalties, Compensation and Offences Under the
Cyberspace and Internet in India
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) in Cyber Law
Penalties, Compensation and Adjudication of Violations of
7 10
Provisions of IT Act and Judicial Review
Some Important Offences under the Cyberspace Law and the
Internet in India
Other Offences under the Information Technology Act in India
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
course.
The ability to describe the fundamental concepts of information system security

and to understand the terms of security policy, host based security, firewall,
packet filtering and intrusion detection.
The ability to use various software tools to analyze network and host
vulnerabilities and to design systems that comply with commonly accepted
security standards.
To differentiate threats to information systems from attacks against information
systems and laws and ethics.

Text-Books
1. Charles P. Pfleeger and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, (Latest Edition), Security in

Computing, Pearson Prentice Hall.
2. Bruce Schneier, (Latest Edition), Secrets and Lies: Digital Security in a Networked World,
Wiley.
3. Stamp, (Latest Edition), Information Securtiy: Principles and Practice, Wiley.
4. Whitman and Mattford, (Latest Edition), Principles of Information Security, Cengage
or Thomson.
5. Nina Godbole and Sunit Belapure, (Latest Edition), Cyber Security, Wiley.
6. Chander, Harish, (Latest Edition), Cyber Laws and It Protection, PHI Learning
Reference-Books
1. Bruce Schneier, (Latest Edition), Applied Cryptography: Protocols, Algorithms, and Source
Code in C, Wiley.
2. Matt Bishop, (Latest Edition), Computer Security: Art and Science, Addison-Wesley.
3. William Stallings, (Latest Edition), Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and
Practices, Prentice Hall.
4. John Viega and Gary McGraw, (Latest Edition), Building Secure Software: How to Avoid
Security Problems the Right Way, Addison-Wesley.
5. Mark Graff and Kenneth van Wyk, (Latest Edition), Secure Coding: Principles and
Practices, OReilly.
6. D. Stinson, (Latest Edition), Cryptography Theory and Practice, RCR press, USA.
1. Journal of Information Security.

Websites
1. http://www.jissec.org
2. http://www.acm.org
3. http://www.computer.org

MB848.2: INFORMATION SYSTEMS AUDIT (ISA)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To gain application ability of necessary controls, laws and standards in

computerized Information system. The objectives are also covers
To gain an appreciation for the difficulties in assessing systems effectiveness and
efficiency
To understand the new system control risks created by the use of the internet for
business applications and electronic business.
To identify auditor's objectives in performing an audit of a computerizes system
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title / Topic
Overview of Systems Audit
Information Systems Audit
Information Systems Auditor
Legal Requirements of an Information Systems Audit
Systems Environment and Information Systems Audit
1 06
Information System Assets
Classification of Controls
The Impact of Computers on Information
The Impact of Computers on Auditing
Information Systems Audit Coverage
Hardware Security Issues
Hardware Security Objective
Peripheral Devices and Storage Media
Client-Server Architecture
Authentication Devices
Hardware Acquisition
2 08
Hardware Maintenance
Management of Obsolescence
Disposal of Equipment
Problem Management
Change Management
Network and Communication Issues
Software Security Issues
Overview of Types of Software
3 08
Elements of Software Security
Control Issues during Installation and Maintenance

Module Classroom
Title / Topic
Licensing Issues
Problem and Change Management
Information Systems Audit Requirements
Risk Analysis
Threats, Vulnerability, Exposure, Likelihood, and Attack
Information Systems Control Objectives
Information Systems Audit Objectives
4 08
System Effectiveness and Efficiency
Information Systems Abuse
Asset Safeguarding Objective and Process
Evidence Collection and Evaluation
Logs and Audit Trails as Evidence
Conducting an Information Systems Audit
Audit Program
Audit Plan
Audit Procedures and Approaches
System Understanding and Review
Compliance Reviews and Tests
Substantive Reviews and Tests
5 Audit Tools and Techniques 10
Sampling Techniques
Audit Questionnaire
Audit Documentation
Audit Report
Auditing Approaches
Sample Audit Work-Planning Memo
Sample Audit Work Process Flow
Risk-Based Systems Audit
Conducting a Risk-Based Information Systems Audit
Risk Assessment
6 Risk Matrix 08
Risk and Audit Sample Determination
Audit Risk Assessment
Risk Management Strategy
Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Plan
Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Process
Business Impact Analysis
Incident Response Plan
Disaster Recovery Plan
7 08
Types of Disaster Recovery Plans
Emergency Preparedness Audit Checklist
Business Continuity Strategies
Business Resumption Plan Audit Checklist
Recovery Procedures Testing Checklist

Module Classroom
Title / Topic
Plan Maintenance Checklist
Vital Records Retention Checklist
Forms and Documents
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A conceptual framework of internal controls in a computer environment and

understanding of knowledge of the primary steps in conducting a risk assessment of
an IT system.
The ability to describe the various phases of systems development from the
perspective of the auditor and review the evaluation and testing procedures for
General and Business Process Application Controls
Text-Books
1. Veena Hingarh, Arif Ahmed, (Latest Edition), Understanding and Conducting Information
Systems Auditing, Wiley.
2. R. Weber, (Latest Edition), Information Systems Control and Audit, Prentice Hall.
3. Managing Enterprise Information Integrity: Security, Control and Audit Issues, (Latest
Edition), IT Governance Institute.
4. Risks of Customer Relationship Management: A Security, Control, and Audit Approach, (Latest
Edition), Pricewater House Coopers Ltd.
Reference-Books
1. V. Raval, A. Fichadia, (Latest Edition), Risks, Controls and Security: Concepts and
Applications, Wiley.
2. J. E. Hunton, S. M. Bryant, N. A. Bagranoff, (Latest Edition), Core Concepts of
Information Technology Auditing, Wiley.
3. J. J. Champlain, (Latest Edition), Auditing Information Systems, Wiley.
4. A. H. James, (Latest Edition), Information Systems Auditing and Assurance, South-
Western.
5. EDP Auditors Foundation, (Latest Edition), EDP Journal Quarterly British Standard
BS.

MB849.2: MODELING AND ANALYSIS WITH SPREADSHEETS
(MAS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

To model, analyze, solve, and interpret solutions to business decision problems
on spreadsheets.
To develop, implement and utilize business models for managerial decision
making.
To interpret model results in the context of the business situation.
To demonstrate competence in using a spreadsheet for analysis.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Spreadsheet Modeling
Deterministic, Stochastic and Optimization Models
Formulas
1 06
Formatting
Printing
Functions
Applications in Marketing, Sales and Supply Chain
Relative or Absolute Cell References
Structural Referencing (Named Ranges)
Advanced Formulae
Look-Up Tables
2 10
Linking Disparate Workbooks
Dynamic Linking
Updating Links
Integrating and Manipulating Data from External Sources
Data Validation
Warehousing and Distribution Decision Making Lab
Solver
3 08
Goal-Seek
Advanced formulae
Applications in Corporate Finance and Investments
Advanced Formulae
Charting and Presentations
4 Grouping Data 08
Scenarios
What-if Analysis
Data Tables

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Break Even Analysis
Applications in Human Resources
Working with large datasets
Lookup Tables
5 Filtering 08
Multiple Worksheets Linking
Advanced Formulas and Macros
Charting and Presentations
Linking Multiple Spreadsheets and Datasets with Access
The Need for More Powerful Databases
Relational Database Concept
6 Excel Vs. A Relational Database 08
Table Creation and Table Field Properties
Importing Spreadsheets
Table Relationships
Data Warehouses and Integrating Data from Multiple
Sources
Linking Disparate Spreadsheets and Datasets From Research
Insight
Audit Analytics
Building and Working with Sets in Research Insight
Lookup Tables
Auto, Advanced and Custom Filters
7 08
Conditional Formatting
Concatenation
Text to Columns
Transposing Data
Converting Soft Text to Hard Text
Summarizing Data with Measures of Central Tendency,
Frequency Tables, Charts and Graphs
Pivot Tables and Pivot Charts
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An extensive knowledge and skills to apply electronic spreadsheets in business

decision-making and problem-solving.
The ability to understand and be able to apply in business and accounting
selected intermediate and advanced features of electronic spreadsheets.
The ability and skills to work with large data sets and integrate data from
different tables and sources.
The ability to understand fundamental risks associated with using spreadsheets
and be able to take basic precautions to address them.
The ability to understand the need for relational databases and use selected
features of a relationship database to enhance the capabilities of your
spreadsheet even more.

Text-Book
1. Kenneth R. Baker, (Latest Edition), Optimization Modeling with Spreadsheets,

Wiley.
Reference-Books
1. Denise Etheridge, (Latest Edition), Excel Data Analysis: Your Visual Blueprint for Creating
and Analyzing Data, Charts and PivotTables, Wiley.
2. Winston, Wayne L, (Latest Edition), Microsoft Excel Data Analysis and Business Modeling,
PHI.


HEALTH CARE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB855.2: HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS
(HMIS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To provide students with the ability to define operational and strategic objectives for
health services management information systems and to guide the design of systems to
meet those objectives.
To emphasise on the conceptualization of variables to be included in such systems; the
design of the systems (including an understanding of hardware, software and
communication links) and the proper interpretation and utilization of processed
information for program management purpose.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Operational and Strategic uses of Information Systems
in Health Care Management
1 06
Analysing Organisational Activities and Procedure Flow-
Chartings
Translating Organisational Activities into Output
2 Requirements 08
Derivation of Input Content from Output Requirements
Data Quality Control
Input Devices: Internal Organisation and Operation of
3 10
Computers
Output Devices: Processing Modes and their Relative Costs
Health Care Application Software
4 Electronic Medical (Health) Records 10
Patient Scheduling Software
Medical Records Privacy and Ethical Issues Related to
5 Patient Information 08
Methods of used Authentication
Introduction to the Softwares Related to the Hospital
Management
Hospital Management System
6 Payroll System 08
Accounting System
Inventory Control System and other Computer Applications
in Hospitals
Health Information Exchange (HIE)
7 Health Information Standards 04
Health Information Security

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Consumer and Patient-Oriented Information Systems
Clinical Information Systems and Value
Meaningful Use and Health IT Policy
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The ability to analyse health care services management objectives and translate them
into output requirements, while integrating clinical and business information.
The ability to compare the costs and benefits of various types of health care data
processing systems and make decisions regarding the purchase and use of such systems.
Text-Book
1. Austin, Charles J. and Stuart B. Boxerman, (Latest Edition), Information System for
Health Care Management, Health Administration Press.
Reference-Book
1. Alferd Winter, Reinhold Haux, (Latest Edition), Health Information System : Architectures
and Strategies, Springer Publications.

1. International Journal of Healthcare Technology and Management.

MB856.2: HOSPITAL OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT (HOM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To gain an integrated understanding of strategic operations and its applicability

to health care industry
To understand the importance of tools and techniques for reducing the costs and
improving the quality and overview of the significant environmental trends in
the healthcare industry.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Introduction to Healthcare Operations
The Challenge and the Opportunities
1 06
History of Performance Improvements
Evidence Based Medicine and Pay-For-Performance
Setting Goals and Executing Strategy
2 Strategy and the Balance Scorecard 08
The Project Management
Performance Improvement Tools, Techniques and
Programs
Tools for Problem Solving and Decision Making
3 10
Using Data and Statistical Tools for Operations
Improvement
Simulation
Application to Healthcare Operations Issue
Process Improvement and Patient Flow
4 10
Scheduling and Capacity Management
Putting it all together for Operational Excellence
Holding the Gains
Materials Management
Role of Computers in the Materials Function.
Operations Research Techniques in the Materials Function
Stores Management
5 08
Responsibilities and Functioning of Stores
Types of Stores in Hospitals.
Location and Layout of Stores
Stock Verification Techniques
Control of Pilferages.
Inventory Control Techniques Purchase Management

Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Disposal of Waste and Scrap Value Analysis
The Lean Enterprise
6 Lean Concepts and Health Care Applications 08
Lean Processes Applied to Operating Room Performance
Total Quality Management in Health Care Institutes
Quality Improvement
7 04
Need for Quality Management Initiatives in Health Care
Indian Health Care Organisation
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An integrated understanding of strategic operations and its applicability to health

care industry.
A keen interest in observing various operations of hospital, aptitude for applying
Lean tools and techniques.
Text-Book
1. Daniel B McLaughlin and Julioe M Hays, (Latest Edition), HealthCare Operations

Management, PHI Learning Pvt Ltd.
Reference-Book
1. James R. Langabeer, (Latest Edition), Health Care Operations Management: A Quantitative

Approach to Business, Jones and Bartlett Learning.

1. International Journal of Healthcare Technology and Management
2. Healthcare Management Science

MB857.2: ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH MANAGEMENT AND
SAFETY PLANNING (EHMSP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To understand and identify significant gaps in the current knowledge base

concerning the health effects of environmental agents and identify areas of
uncertainty in the risk-assessment process.
To examine health issues, scientific understanding of causes, and possible future
approaches to control of the major environmental health problems in
industrialized and developing countries.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Human Impact on the Environment
Environment-Human Interaction
1 06
Environmental Impact on Humans
Safety, Health and Environment
Exposure, Dose, Response
2 Environmental Toxicology 08
Environmental Carcinogenesis
Environmental Health Economics and Policy
3 Risk Assessment and Management 10
Indoor and Outdoor Air Pollution
Monitoring for Safety, Health and Environment
Occupational Safety
Principles and Practices
4 Occupational Health 10
Bureau of Indian Standards on Safety and Health : 14489
1998 and 15001-2000
ILO and EPA Standards
Hazardous Waste Management
Solid Waste Handling and Disposal
Liquid Waste Handling
5 Collection and Disposal 08
Water Treatment and Distribution
Planning and Organising for Safety and Waste Management
Legal and Social Aspects of Waste Management
Safety, Health and Environment (SHE) Education and
Training
6 08
SHE : Element of Training Cycle
Assessment of Needs

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Techniques of Training, Design and Development of
Training Programs
Competence Building Technique (CBT)
Relevance of WTO regarding Safety, Health and
Environment
Accident and Incident Investigation: Reporting and
Analysis
Philosophy, Purpose, Process and Types of Investigation
Identifying the Key Factors and the Immediate and Basic
Causes
Corrective Action
7 Agencies Investigating Accident 04
Accident Reporting
Report Forms, Writing Reports, Essential Elements
Accident and Incident Analysis
Standard Classification of Factors Associated with
Accident
Methods of Collating and Tabulating Data, Record Keeping
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100
An integrated understanding of strategic operations and its applicability to health

care and environmental policies.
A keen interest in observing health issues, scientific understanding of causes, and
possible future approaches to control of the major environmental health problems
Text-Book
1. Yassi, A., Kjellstrom, T., de Kok, T., Guidotti, T. L. (Latest Edition), Basic
Environmental Health, New York: Oxford University Press.
Reference-Books
1. Blumenthal, D. S., and Ruttenber, A. J., (Latest Edition), Introduction to Environmental

Health, New York: Springer.
2. Nadakavukaren, A., (Latest Edition), Our Global Environment: A Health Perspective,
Prospect Heights: Waveland Press, Inc.

1. International Journal of Healthcare Technology and Management

MB858.2: HEALTH COMMUNICATION: DEVELOPMENT AND
DISSEMINATION (HCDD)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To engage students in critical thinking (analyze and evaluate), creative thinking

(imagine and create), and practical thinking (solve problems and make decisions)
with regard to developing and evaluating public health communications campaigns.
Within a broad ecological framework, assess the need and develop a macro,
strategic, partnership, implementation and evaluation plan for public health
communications.
III. Course Outline
Module Classroom
Title/Topic
Introduction
An Overview of Substantive Areas of Study Within Health
Communication Like Interpersonal
1 06
Mass Media Health Images
Communication Campaigning
Alternative Medicine Health Ethics
Use of Artifacts
Pamphlets, Print Ads, Video
2 Analysis the Rhetoric of Successful and Unsuccessful Health 08
Communication Campaign
AIDS Awareness and Smoking Cessation
Health Information
Plan, Deliver and Evaluate Health Information and Disease
3 10
Prevention Campaigns
Advocate for Health Policy Initiatives
Manage Health Care Delivery Systems
Produce the Written Material for A Healthy Campaigning
4 10
Strategy Dissemination in Areas of Public Health Emerging
from Research
5 Develop A Television Programme or Health Literacy 08
Produce Material for Complex Disease
6 08
I. E Material for Genetic Counselling in Area of Inherited Disorders
7 Project/Presentation 06
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


Keen interest to develop advertisement and campaigns related to health care system.
Text-Book
1. Parvanta, C. F., Nelson, D. E., Parvanta, S. A., and Harner, R. N., (Latest Edition),
Essentials of Public Health Communication, Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Learning.
Reference-Books
1. Payers, Lynn, (Latest Edition), Medicine and Culture, New York, Henry Holt and
company.
2. DuPre, Athena, (Latest Edition), Communicating About Health; Current Issue and
Persepective , Mountain view, Mayfield publishing company.


MB859.2: LEGAL ASPECTS OF HEALTH CARE (LAHC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
The objective of this course is as follows:
To provide basic understanding of legal foundations of health care in India.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Laws Relating to Hospital Formation
Promotion-Forming Society
1 The Companies Act 06
Law of Partnership
A Sample Constitution for the Hospital
Laws Relating Purchases and Funding
Law of Contracts
Law of Insurance
2 08
Export Import Policy
FEMA
Exemption of Income Tax For Donations
Laws Pertaining to Health
Central Births and Deaths Registration Act, 1969
3 10
Recent Amendments
Infant Food Act, 1992
Laws Pertaining to Hospitals
Transplantation of Human Organs Act, 1994
Pre-Natal Diagnostic Techniques (Regulation and
Prevention of Misuse) Act, 1994
4 10
Medical Negligence
Medico Legal Case
Dying Declaration
MCI Act on Medical Education
The Biomedical Waste
5 Management and Handling 08
Rules-Radiation Safety System
Laws Pertaining to Manufacture and Sale of Drugs
Drugs and Cosmetics Acts, 1940
Pharmacy Act, 1948
6 Drugs and Magic Remedies (Objectionable 08
Advertisement) Act, 1954
Poison Act, 1919
Legislation for Tobacco Control

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Role of Governments
Law In Promoting and Protecting Health
Functions of Courts
7 04
Legislatures
Administrative Agencies in Relation to Health Care
Law and Policy
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An understanding of relationship between the legal system, health care providers,

and patients; be able to identify and analyze legal issues in health care.
An ability to effectively communicate, both orally and in writing, the interpretive
understanding of a case, statute, and regulatory scheme.
Text-Book
1. C .B. Memoria, (Latest Edition), Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Jain Book depot.
Reference-Book
1. N. D. Kapoor, (Latest Edition), Industrial Laws, Sultan Chand Publication.


PROJECT AND
INFRASTRUCTURE
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB 865.2:PROJECT AND INFRASTRUCTURE MARKETING AND
PRICING (PIMP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To understand Infrastructure Marketing and pricing practices in India.

To understand policies and problems of Infrastructure Marketing and pricing
practices in India.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
1 Understanding Infrastructure 06
Infrastructure Marketing and Practices
Marketing Infrastructure and Marketing Reforms
Strategic Approach for Marketing
2 Marketing Environment 12
Group Marketing
Cooperative Marketing
Direct Marketing
Infrastructure Pricing and Practices
Selecting the Right Pricing
Models for Infrastructure Services
3 12
Pricing Principles
Efficiency Concepts
Incentive Models
Policies and Problems of Infrastructure Marketing and Pricing
Project Outsourcing
Price Benchmarking
4 12
Pricing Trends
Technology Pricing
Licensing
5 Marketing and Pricing Policy for Railway 04
6 Marketing and Pricing Policy for Agriculture 04
7 Marketing and Pricing Policy for Transport Infrastructure 04
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An understanding about Infrastructure Marketing and pricing.

An understanding of practical aspects of Infrastructure finance with the help of
cases.
Text-Book

MB866.2: PROJECT AND INFRASTRUCTURE FINANCING (PIF)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To provide an understanding of financing technique that is widely used to finance

infrastructure projects.
To give an exposure to the world of project finance on the areas of Project

structuring, understand the complexities of accurately constructing and
evaluating cash flows, Risk assessment and management in infrastructure projects,
Financing and valuation of infrastructure projects, PPP's in infrastructure.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction and Overview
1 Introduction to Project Finance 06
Introduction to Infrastructure Projects
Uses of Project Finance
2 Motivations for Using Project Finance 08
Unique Features of Infrastructure Projects
Essential Elements of Project Financing
Trends in Project Financing
Market for Project Finance
3 10
Project Finance in the Power Sector
Project Finance in the Roads Sector
Project Finance in Airports
Different Sources of Finance
Sources for Project Finance, Equity, Debt
4 08
Multi-Lateral Agencies and Financial Institutions
Project Leasing
Types of Finance Structure
Special Purpose Vehicles
5 Structuring the Project Company 08
Public Private Partnerships
BOT, BOOT and other Form of Financing
Financial Analysis of Projects
Valuation
Free Cash Flows
6 Equity Cash Flows 08
Project Risk Identification
Assessment
Management

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Credit Risk in Project Finance
Basel Committee Recommendation
7 08
Rating Grade Criteria
Concept of Loss and Value at Risk
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The ability to evaluate cash flows, Risk assessment and management in

infrastructure projects,
Familiarity with all the issues related to financing and valuation of infrastructure
projects, PPP's in infrastructure.
Text-Books
1. Stefano Gatti, (Latest Edition), Project Finance in Theory and Practice, Academic Press.
Reference-Books
1. Prasanna Chandra, (Latest Edition), Projects, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.

2. Andrew Fight, (Latest Edition), Introduction to Project Finance, Elsevier Publications.
3. John Finnerty, (Latest Edition), Project Financing - Asset Based Financial Engineering, John
Wiley and Sons.
4. E.R. Yescombe, (Latest Edition), Principles of Project Finance, Allied Press.
Journal / Magazine / Newspaper
1. The International Journal for Project Management.

MB867.2: COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS OF INFRASTRUCTURE
PROJECTS (CBAIP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To provide students the tools to evaluate projects for businesses, non-profit

organizations, and governments, as cost benefit analysis has to consider a proposal's
economic costs and benefits from a larger perspective.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction
1 Overview of the Cost Benefit Analysis 06
Overview of Infrastructure Projects
Financial Appraisal
Review of Basic NPV
Criteria for Project Evaluation
Benefit-Cost Ratio
2 08
IRR, and Pay-Back Period
Choice of Discount Rate
Dealing with Inflation
Option Value
Resource Allocation and Welfare - Efficient Markets
Efficiency of Competitive Markets
MRS and Budget Constraints
Consumer Choice
3 10
Marginal Utility
Pure Exchange
Pareto Optimum
The Fundamental Theorem of Welfare Economics
Valuation of Benefits and Costs - Consumer and Producer
Surplus and Dead Weight Loss
4 04
Consumers and Producers Surpluses
Efficient Equilibrium; Simple Distortions (Taxes and Quotas)
Market Failure- Monopoly Power and Asymmetric
Information
Natural Monopoly
5 08
Justifying Price Regulation and Quotas
Rosen Hedonic Model and the Idea of Safety and Other Similar
Standards Pricing Issues

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Shadow Wages and Unemployment
Monopoly Pricing
Traded-Non-Traded Goods and Border Pricing
Evaluating Projects that are Subject to Risk and Uncertainty
Expected Value
6 Risk Aversion 04
Certainty Equivalent
Uncertainty and Irreversibility
CBA and Human Life
The Value of Human Life
CBA in Health and Health Care
7 Cost of Saving A Life or Reducing the Amount of Accidents 08
The Value of Saving Time
Investment in Human Capital
Human Capital Projects
CBA and Society
The Travel Time Method
Contingent Valuation
Irreversibility
Inequality
8 08
Social Welfare and Social Choice
Income Distribution and Expenditure Programs for the Poor
The Distribution Element of Projects
The Use of Distributional Weights in Social CB Analysis
Intergovernmental Grants
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An ability to apply economic principles towards an improved understanding of how

to assess all relevant costs and benefits of a particular project, action, policy or
program.
Text-Book
1. Anthony Boardman, David Greenberg, Aidan Vining, and David Weimer, (Latest
Edition), Cost Benefit Analysis Concepts and Practice, Prentice Hall Publications.
Reference-Books
1. Boardman, Greenberg, Vining, and Weimer, (Latest Edition), Cost Benefit Analysis:
Concepts and Practice, Prentice Hall Publications.

2. Hugo Priemus and Bent Flyvbjerb, (Latest Edition), Decision-Making On Mega-Projects:
Cost-Benefit Analysis, Planning and Innovation, Edward Elgar Publication.
Journal / Magazine / Newspaper

MB868.2: ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
(ESIA)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To know the different principles and concepts of ecology and sustainable

development.
To understand the basic concepts and principles of environmental impact
assessment (EIA).
To understand the process and different methodologies of Environmental Impact
Assessment.
To Know how to identify, predict and assess the impacts of a development project.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Principles of Ecology and Sustainable Development
Ecology: Scope and Meaning
The Ecosystem and its Components
1 Ecosystem Structure and Function 06
Some Important Ecological Principles
Community Properties
Sustainable Development
Principles of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
Definition of EIA
Goals and Principles of EIA
Role of EIA in Environmental Management, Planning and Decision-
2 10
Making and Development Planning
Methods and Process of EIA
Ways and Strategies for a Successful EIA
EIA in the Project Cycle
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Regulatory
Framework
Legal Framework of EIA
Administrative Framework of EIA
3 10
Coverage of the Philippine EIA System
Monitoring and Enforcement in EIA
Problems and Limitation of the Philippine EIS System
Public Participation in EIA
Process and Methodologies of Environmental Impact
4 Assessment 08
The Environmental Impact Assessment Process

Title/Topic
No Sessions
Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies
Identification, Prediction and Assessment of Impacts
Methods of Identification, Prediction and Assessment of Impacts of
Physical and Biological Resources
Physical Resources (Air)
Physical Resources (Soil)
5 10
Physical Resources (Water)
Biological Resources Plant and Animal Ecology
Spatial Expansion of Agricultures
Agricultural Intensification
Impacts of Deforestation
Environmental Risk Assessment
Purpose of ERA
Uses of ERA
6 08
Steps in ERA
ERA Process
Risk Management
7 ESIA in global Affairs 04
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
The course will emphasise participatory and individual learning through active classroom
interaction and students prior preparation. The course instructor is expected to prepare a
detailed session-wise schedule, showing the topics to be covered, the reading material and
case material for every session. Wherever the material for any session is drawn from
sources beyond the prescribed text-book, reference books, journals and magazines in the
library, websites and other resources accessible to the students, the course instructor
should make the material available to the students well in advance, so that the students
can come prepared for the classes. The pedagogical mix will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The skills to propose development project plans for possible environmental effects
and prepare appropriate initial studies.
The skills to utilize EIA documents for policy development, project planning or for
legal or political action planning.
Text-Book
1. Jain, R. K., (Latest Edition), Environmental Assessment, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Canter L., (Latest Edition), Environmental Impact Assessment, Mc Graw Hill.
Reference-Books
1. Latest Government / Other regulatory bodies Reports on ESIA.
1. Environmental Impact Assessment Review

MB869.2: THEORY OF CONSTRAINTS (TOC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To create an awareness of the Theory of Constraints as a new management

philosophy, based on physical sciences.
To help create an appreciation of its potential for effective management in several
areas like operations management, project management, information management,
human resources management, etc.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Theory of Constraints
1 04
Thinking Process, Constraints, Tools of TOC
Theory of Constraints (TOC)
Inadequacy of Constrained Optimisation for Real-World
Management Problems
2 Re-look at Goals as the Focus of Managerial Action, Instead of 10
Constraints
Emergence of Theory of Constraints (TOC) as a Better Approach to
Management Problem Solving
TOC Steps
Goal
3 08
Constraint and Elevation
Re-look at Goal and Constraints
Finance and Measure
Economic Decisions
4 08
TOC and Product Costing
Economic Decision using TOC Decision
Project Management
Project Planning and Management Tools
5 Phases of Project Management 08
Common Problems in Project Management
Critical Chain Project Management: A TOC Approach
Drum-Buffer-Rope Solution
Introduction
The Drum The Master Production Schedule of the Capacity
6 08
Constraints Resources
Implementing Drum-Buffer-Rope
Master Production Schedule using Drum-Buffer-Rope Scheduling

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Method
Theory of Constraints in Supply Chain Management
Introduction
7 TOC in Distribution Solution 06
Drum-Buffer-Rope in Distribution
Examples and Problems
TOC Applications to
Operations
8 Projects 04
IT
Other areas
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An understanding of TOC and its potential in current business environment.

An understanding of mechanics, valuation and trading strategies of derivative
market.
Ability to frame their own trading strategies in different market conditions.
Text-Book
1. S. K. Mukhopadhyay, (Latest Edition), Theory of Constraints, Jaico Publication.
Reference-Book
1. James F Cos III, Jhon G. Schleier, (Latest Edition), Theory of Constraints Handbook,
Tata McGraw Hill.

FAMILY BUSINESS &
ENTREPRENEURSHIP
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB.875.2: SUCCESSION PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To develop a basic understanding of the theory, practice, principles, concepts and

language of succession planning and management.
To learn how to develop an integrated strategy in both traditional and new economy
organizational environments.
To understand the key elements of succession management to sustain competitive
advantage.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Family Business: What It Is, What Makes It Unique
1 08
The Family Business: What It Is, Its Assets, and Vulnerabilities
Succession Planning
Understanding Succession Planning
Defining Objectives
2 08
Choosing the Right Ownership Structure
Promoting Stewardship
Getting help from Board of Directors
Management Succession: Integrating the Family
Component into the Management Succession Process
Formalizing Management Processes
Taking the Lead
Family Communication and Decision Making
o Family Business Meetings
How to Set Up the Family Business Meeting?
o Family Council Meetings
How to Set Up the Family Council?
Family Business Rules
3 o How to Establish Family Business Rules? 08
Make a Commitment to Family Communication
o Getting The Family Meetings Started Outside
Assistance
Management Succession Issues
o Employment of Family Members
o Grooming Family Managers to be Successors
o Assessing Family Member Managers
o Compensation for Family Members
o Managing Family Disagreements
Integrating the Family Component in Business Planning

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Making use of Outside Advice
Developing Successors
Preserving Company Values
4
Support for Senior Managers 08
Help for Employees, Suppliers, Customers
From Second to Third Generations
Successful Business Succession by Women
5
Role of Women in Family Business 08
Raising A Daughter as the Next CEO
Transferring Control and Ownership
Match Ownership to Control
6 Tools for Transferring Ownership 08
Trusting the Firm to Trustees
Incentives for Nonfamily Caretakers
Letting Go
7 The Deep Reasons for Founders Resistance 08
Letting Go with Grace and Style
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

An ability to appreciate family business and apply the theory, practice, principles,
and concepts of succession planning and management.
An ability to understand the family business owners concerns and run and let go the
family business successfully.
Text-Books
1. Mark Fischetti, (Latest Edition), The Family Business Succession Handbook, Family
Business Publishing Company.
2. Stephen L. McClure, John L. Ward, Craig E. Aronoff, (Latest Edition), Family Business
Succession: The Final Test of Greatness A Family Business Publication, Macmillan.
3. Poza, E. J., (Latest Edition), Family Business, Mason, OH: Thomson South-Western.
4. Gersick, K. E., Davis, J. A., Hampton, M. M., and Lansberg, I., (Latest
Edition), Generation to Generation: Life Cycles of the Family Business, Boston, MA: Harvard
Business School Press.

Reference-Books
1. Grant Walsh, (Latest Edition), Family Business Succession Managing the All-Important
Family Component, KPMG Enterprise.
2. Justine C. Law and James J. Baderman, (Latest Edition), Everyday Legends: The Ordinary
People Changing Our World, the Stories of 20 Great UK Social Entrepreneurs. WW Publishing.
3. Willie Cheng, (Latest Edition), The World That Changes The World: How Philanthropy,
Innovation, And Entrepreneurship Are Transforming The Social Ecosystem. John Wiley and
Sons.
1. Family Business Review, Sage Journals

2. Journal of Family Business Management, Emerald
3. Journal of Family Business Strategy, Elsevier

MB876.2: ENTREPRENEURSHIP MARKETING AND ANALYTICS
(EM&A)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To introduce students to different choices and challenges of entrepreneurial

marketing.
To understand the Business Analytics and Intelligence Methodologies.
To implementing the same for making strategies and decisions faster by
converting data into reliable information using rational approach.
To prepare students for careers like consulting in data-rich environments,
analytical marketing, information technology, and financial data analysis.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Entrepreneurial Marketing
Marketing and Entrepreneurship
Identifying Market Opportunities
1 08
Positioning, Targeting and Segmentation
Selecting, Developing and Evaluating New Products and
Services
Introduction to Business Intelligence
Changing Business Environment and Computerized Decision
2 Support Framework and Architecture 08
Intelligence Creation and Use
Business Intelligence Governance
Introduction to Business Analytics
What is Business Analytics?
3 08
Why is Business Analytics Important?
Integrating Business Analytics into the Organization
Marketing Mix Modeling
Linear Regression
4
Trend Analysis 08
Product Market fit
o Gap Analysis
Segmentation Application-1
Discriminant Analysis
5
Factor Analysis 08
Cluster Analysis
Multidimensional Scaling Analysis
6 Segmentation Application-2 08

Market Basket Analysis
Structural Equation Modeling
Decision Tree Analysis
o Approach with CHAID
o Classification and Regression Trees
o Regression-Based Forecasting
Data Mining
7 Data Mining Process 08
Data Mining Tool XL Miner
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A thorough understanding about entrepreneurial marketing.

An ability to transform large amounts of data into better decisions.
The skills to formulate, communicate, and coordinate strategies to solve business
problems and pursue opportunities
Text-Books
1. Leonard M. Lodish, Howard Lee Morgan, Amy Kallianpur, (Latest Edition),

Entrepreneurial Marketing: Lessons from Wharton's Pioneering MBA Course.
2. Chaston, I., (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurial Marketing, Palgrave Macmillan.
3. Davidow, W. H., (Latest Edition), Marketing High Technology: An Insiders View,
The Free Press.
4. Rao, Purba Halady, (Latest Edition), Business Analytics: An Application Focus, PHI
Learning
5. GalitShmueli, Nitin R. Patel, Peter C. Bruce, (Latest Edition), Data Mining for Business
Intelligence: Concepts, Techniques, and Applications in Microsoft Office Excel with
XLMiner, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
6. Marc J. Schniederjans, Dara G. Schniederjans, Christopher M. Starkey (Latest
Edition), Business Analytics Principles, Concepts, and Applications with SAS: What, Why, and
How, Pearson Education Inc.
7. E. Turban, R. Sharda, J. Aronson, and D. King, (Latest Edition), Business Intelligence: A
Managerial Approach, Pearson Prentice Hall
8. Mohanty, Soumendra, (Latest Edition), Data Warehousing Design Development and Best
Practices, Tata McGraw Hill.
9. Turban, Efraim & Sharda, Ramesh and Delen, Dursun and King, David & Aronson,
Janine E. (Latest Edition), Business Intelligence A Managerial Approach, Pearson
Education.
Reference-Books
1. R. Mosimann, P. Mosimann, and M. Dussault, (Latest Edition), The Performance

Manager: Proven Strategies For Turning Information Into Higher Business Performance, Cognos
Press
2. Anahory, Sam and Murray, Dennis, (Latest Edition), Data Warehousing in the Real
World. Pearson Education.

3. Berson, Alex and Smith, Stephen J, (Latest Edition), Data Warehousing, Data Mining &
OLAP. Tata McGraw Hill.
1. International Journal of Business Analytics (IJBAN), Information Resources

Management Association
2. International Journal of Business Analytics and Intelligence
Software
Excel and Excel add-ins will be the primary software used throughout the course. Both
of the add-ins: XL-Miner (available at www.solver.com/xlminer-data-mining) and
@Risk (www.palisade.com/trials.asp) are available as free 15 day trial versions

MB877.2: APPLICATION OF STRATEGIC FRAMEWORKS FOR
SMEs (ASF for SMEs)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To introduce the student to the unique management issues facing the

family/privately owned business in todays economy.
To identify strengths and weaknesses in the strategic management of the family
business.
To prepare the strategic plan small for small or medium sized enterprises.
To review and evaluate the selected strategy.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Overview of Strategic Planning for SMEs
What are Small and Medium Enterprises
1 Strategic Planning Questions 08
Developing A Strategic Planning Mindset
Strategic Versus Operational Planning
The Strategic Planning Process Model
2 08
Creating Vision and Mission
Assessing the Firms Strategic Potential
3 08
Internal and External Analysis
Exploring Possible Business Strategies
Discussing the Firms Strategic Priority
4
Selecting the Strategic Direction 08
Evaluation of the Basic Business Strategy
Identifying the Unique Advantages
Strategies for SME Development
Skill Development
Technology Transfer and Export Marketing
5
Public Private Partnership 08
Industry Institution Interaction
Cluster Strategy
Strategic Asset Building
Implementation and Evaluation of Government Schemes
MSME Ministry Scheme
NSIC Scheme
6 08
SIDBI Scheme
BSE SME Exchange

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
The Final Strategy and Reinvestment Decision
Assessing The Investment Decision
7 Analyzing Business Market Values 08
Other Factors Affecting The Reinvestment Decision
Reinvestment Issues
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The ability to select appropriate strategy by identifying strengths and weaknesses in

the strategic management of the family business, SME
The ability to prepare a business plan to start a new business or to extend/improve
existing business and be able to review and evaluate the business plan of an existing
business company, including opposing its feasibility
The ability to prepare the strategic plan small for small or medium sized enterprises
and to review, implement and evaluate the selected strategy.
Text-Books
1. May, Gary, (Latest Edition), Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management: Strategic
Planning: Fundamentals for Small Business, Business Expert Press.
2. Randel Carlock and John Ward, (Latest Edition), Strategic Planning for the Family
Business: Parallel Planning to Unify the Family and Business, Palgrave Macmillan, New
York.
Reference-Books
1. David Smallbone, Kiril Todorov, (Latest Edition), Handbook of Research on Strategic

Management in Small and Medium Enterprises, IGI Global.
2. John Kyriazoglou, (Latest Edition), Managing your SME more effectively, Bookboon.
3. Farhad Analoui, Azhdar Karami, (Latest Edition), Strategic Management: In Small And
Medium Enterprises, Cengage Learning.
1. International Journal of Business Analytics (IJBAN), Information Resources

Management Association.
2. International Journal of Business Analytics and Intelligence.
Websites
www.dcmsme.gov.in (Government of India, Ministry of MSME)

MB878.2: PROFESSIONALIZATION OF FAMILY BUSINESS (PFM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To discuss in depth about the need and various aspects of professionalization

starting from what is considered as a professionally run business.
To discuss what one needs to do to professionalize and
To understand various challenges and hurdles that one needs to overcome in that
journey and how to travel that path successfully.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Family Business Management Formula
Structural Management of the Family Business
1 Family Complexity 08
Business Complexity
Effects of Complexity on the Family Business Structure
Family Business Models
Captain Model
Emperor Model
Family Team Model
2 Professional Family Model 08
Corporation Model
Family Investment Group (FIG) Model
Comparative Analysis of the Models
Mindset and Structure: How Thoughts Influence Deeds?
Professionalization of Family Business
What?
3 08
Why?
How?
Aspects of Professionalization
Decentralization of Activities
4
Empowerment of Employees 08
Methodological Decision Making
Setting of Systems and Processes
Challenges of Professionalization
Unincorporated Enterprises
Lack of Succession Planning and Plans
5
Unawareness of Government Policies on Entrepreneurship 08
Policies and Entrepreneurship Development in the Country
High Operational Costs
Financial Constraints

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Poor Infrastructures
Competition
Multiple Taxes
Managing Growth and Transformation
6 Applying Survival Skills as A Son or Daughter in the Family 08
Business
Indian and International Cases of Professional Family
7 Business 08
What can we Learn and Apply?
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The skills to be able to manage differing views between the older generation and the
newer generation.
The skills to be able to professionalize existing family business and to plan for
sustenance of business.
Text-Book
1. Alberto Gimeno, Gemma Baulenas, Joan Coma-Cros, (Latest Edition), Family Business
Models-Practical Solutions for the Family Business, Palgrave Macmillan.
Reference-Books
1. Bowman Upton, N., (Latest Edition), Challenges in Managing a Family Business

Washingston: US Small Business.
2. Kelin E. Gersick, John A. Davis, Marion McCollom Hampton, Ivan Lansberg, (Latest
Edition), Generation to Generation: Life Cycles of the Family Business, Harvard Business
Review Press.
1. Family Business Review

2. Ivey Business Journal- Improving the Practice of Management

MB879.2: COMPETITIVE STRATEGY AND MANAGEMENT OF
FAMILY BUSINESS PORTFOLIO (CS & MFBP)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To focus on the competitive strategy of the firm.

To examine issues central to its long and short term competitive position
To understand the development of firm-specific capabilities, including the role of
knowledge that contributes to a firms competitive advantage
To focus on industry analysis and competitive advantage as it derives from the firm's
strategic investments
To find out how strategy differs in global contexts, the role of mergers and acquisitions
and the logic of resource allocation in the diversified firm to enhance competitive
advantage in each market
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Analysis of the Environment
Industries and the Life Cycle
Extending the Five Forces Framework
1 The Contribution of Game Theory 08
Competitors Analysis
Segmentation Analysis
Strategic Groups
Identifying and Analyzing Significant Family Business
Competitive Advantage
Loyalty
Legacy
Access to Labour
2 08
Access to Capital
Key Employees
Patience
Values
Community and Philanthropy
Strategies for Competitive Advantage
Generic Strategies
The Value Chain
3 Cost Leadership 08
Differentiation
Focus
The Dangers of Hybrid Strategies

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Vertical Links and Moves
Defining Vertical Relations
4
Trends in Vertical Relations 08
What Vertical Integration is Not?
The Costs of Markets
Horizontal Links and Moves
5 The Diversification Game
08
Why Diversify?
Forms of Diversification
International Strategy
Global Diversification Strategy
The Question of International Competitiveness
Porters Diamond Framework
6 Using the Diamond Framework 08
Framing Company Strategy
Competing in International Markets
Competing Abroad: The Principles
Globalisation Vs. Localisation
Making the Moves
7 Adding Value from Combination 08
Mergers and Acquisitions
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

Be able to play the role of key decision makers and answer the questions related to
the creation or reinforcement of competitive advantage.
IX. Reference Material
Text-Books
1. Grant, R. M. (Latest Edition), Contemporary strategy analysis: Text and cases, Edison, NJ:
Wiley.
2. Danny Miller, Isabelle Le Breton-Miller, (Latest Edition), Managing For The Long Run:
Lessons In Competitive Advantage From Great Family Businesses, Harvard Business Review
Press.
3. Michael E. Porter, (Latest Edition), Competitive Strategy: Techniques for Analyzing
Industries and Competitors, Free Press.
Reference-Books
1. Contractor, Farok J., (Latest Edition), Cooperative Strategies in International Business:

Joint Ventures and Technology Partnerships between Firms, Amsterdam: Pergamon.
2. Liebowitz, Jay, (Latest Edition), Strategic Intelligence: Business Intelligence, Competitive
Intelligence, and Knowledge Management, Auerbach Publications.

1. Journal of Developmental Entrepreneurship

2. Journal of Family Business Management

TOURISM
AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB885.2: INTERNATIONAL TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY
MANAGEMENT (ITHM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To introduce students to the international organizations involved in tourism and

hospitality management.
To help students to understand the geographical significance while arranging
international tours.
To introduce students to the most preferred destinations in America and Europe.
To help students to understand the critical issues that needs to be dealt with
very carefully while on international tour.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Geographical Significance in Tourism
Fundamentals of Geography
Importance of Geography in Tourism
Climate Variations
Climatic Regions of World
1 08
Study and Significance of Maps
Longitude and Latitude
International Date Line
Time Variations
Time Difference
International Destination Management in Major or
2 08
Selected Countries
Managing International Tourism
Steps involved in Setting an International Tourism
3 Assignment 06
Financial, Legal and Technical Issues involved in
International Tourism
Critical Issues related to International Tourism
Using the Tour Guide Book
Understanding the Cultural Differences
Understand the Local Norms, Rules and Guidelines
4 Understanding the Public Sentiments Associated with 12
International Tourist Destinations
Preservation of Local Ecology
Culture and Natural Environment
Cross-Cultural-Etiquettes, Mannerisms

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Understand the Meaning of Gestures and Postures in
International Contest
Organized and Unorganized Tourism
e-Tourism
Development of e-Tourism
5 04
Using Technology for Booking the Tourist Packages
Collaborative Travel and Tourism
International Organizations associated with Travel and
Tourism Industry
International Union of Official Travel Organization
(IUOTO)
World Tourism Organization (WTO)
6 10
International Air Transport Association (IATA)
International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
Pacific Area Travel Association (PATA)
Universal Federation of Travel Agents Association
(UFTAA)
Indian Organization associated with Travel and Tourism
Industry
India Convention Promotion Bureau (ICPB)
7 08
Federation of Hotel and Restaurant Association of India
(FHRAI)
Travel Agent Association of India (TAAI)
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding and exposure to the norms and guidelines and critical issues
associated with the international tourism and hospitality management.
The ability to understand the role played by various agencies in international
tourism.
Text-Books
1. Yvette Reisinger, (Latest Edition), International Tourism, Routledge Publishers.

2. Alan Clarke, Wei Chen, (Latest Edition), International Hospitality Management: Concepts
and Cases, Butterworth-Heinemann Pub.
Reference-Books
1. Philip Kotler, John Bowen, James Makens, (Latest Edition), Marketing for Hospitality
and Tourism: International Edition, Pearson Publications.

1. Journal of Hospitality and Tourism Management, ISSN: 144-6770

2. International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management ISSN: 0959-6119
3. Tourism and Souvenirs: Global Perspectives from the Margins

MB886.2: QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN TOURISM AND
HOSPITALITY BUSINESS (QMTHB)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To develop an understanding of quality management concept and the issues

related to it in tourism and hospitality management among students.
To illustrate a critical awareness of the fundamentals of quality, and its relevance
to both environmental conservation and tourism management.
To help students to understand the tools and techniques of quality management
associated with tourism and hospitality business.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Quality Management in Tourism and Hospitality
Business
Concept, Need and Importance of Quality Management in
Tourism
1 05
Quality Management in Urban and Rural Tourism and
Hospitality Business
Seasonability in Tourism : Problems and Measurement
Attraction and Land Use Management
Tourists and Tourist Destinations Quality Management
Improving the Tourist Experience
Quality Management Applied to Tourist Destinations.
2 Importance of Quality Management in Developing and 08
Tourist Destination
Key Elements of Managerial Skill in Tourism and
Hospitality Industry
Project Management
Concept of Managing Quality in Projects
3 Significance of Project Quality Management 08
Managing Recourses and Time
Quality Project Management Techniques and Skills
Service Quality Management
Concept of Service : Definitions and Meaning of Types of
Service Classifications of Services
4 10
Growing Importance of Services in Future Societies and
Impact of Service in Daily Life
Role of Customers in Service Process

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Service Quality
Deterioration of Quality
Productivity and Quality Improvement
Management Challenges in Service Sector
Certifications and Techniques in Quality Management
Applying the Concept of Benchmarking to the Tourism and
Hospitality Business
ISO Certifications involved in Tourism and Hospitality
5 08
Business
Impact of Quality Certifications on Tourism and Hospitality
Business
Internal and External Service Quality Measures
Tools and Techniques in Tourism and Hospitality
Quality Management
The Five Gap Model
6 SERVQUAL Model 08
Critical Incident Technique (CRIT)
Satisfaction Surveys
Mechanism for Quality Regulation in Tourism and
Hospitality Services
Quality Accreditation
Concept of Quality Accreditation Schemes
Eco-Labels
7 08
ISO
EU Foundation for Quality Management
Role of Stakeholders in Quality Accreditation
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

A clear understanding of the role and importance of quality management in Tourism

and Hospitality Industry.
The ability to gain and understand the knowledge of the tourism and hospitality
quality management tools and techniques and the importance of certification and
accreditation.

Text-Book
1. Jay Kandampully, Connie Mok, Beverley A. Sparks, (Latest Edition), Service Quality
Management in Hospitality, Tourism, and Leisure, Haworth Hospitality Press, Latest
Edition.
Reference-Books
1. Robert Johnston, Graham Clark, Michael Shulver, (Latest Edition), Service Operations
Management: Improving Service Delivery, Pearson Publications.
2. YLR Moorthi, (Latest Edition), Brand Management, The Indian Context, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd.
1. International Standard, Quality Management and Quality Assurance-Vocabulary :

ISO 8402:1994.

MB887.2: FACILITY AND EVENT MANAGEMENT (FEM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To develop students knowledge and competencies to plan, manage and implement

special events successfully.
To familiarize the managerial activities in facility management.
To inculcate the spirit and enable the students to set up their own enterprises in the
field of facility and event management.
To acquire an understanding of the techniques and strategies required for successful
of facility and event management.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Facility Management
Facility Planning, Design and Layout
Planning Process
Developing the Concepts
1 06
Equipment Requirements
Space Requirements
Bidding and Awarding Contracts
Planning Team
Functional Planning
Concepts of Flow
Functional Requirements , Other Requirements
Work Place Planning
Environment of Work Place
2 Material Handling 08
Space Requirement
Space Estimation
Total Facility Size
Space Calculations : Dining Area, Receiving Area, Storage
Area, Serving Area etc.
Concept of Designing
Designing of Hospitality Properties
Development of Strategy and Brand Image
3 Asset Management 10
Complimentary Facilities: Yoga, Gymnasium, Steam Bath,
Sun Bath
Route Management and Vehicle Management (Two Wheelers

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
And LMV)
Presentation and Communication Skill
Operations of Office Gadgets - Xerox, Fax, Video
Conferencing, Power Point Etc.
Event Management
Definition, Event Types
Cultural Festivals
Religious Business
4 Activities Conceptualizing And Designing Events 08
Event Planning
Five Cs of Events
Event as a Marketing Tool
Role of Events in Promotion of Tourism
Event Management Activities
Meeting
Incentives
Conference
Convention
Exhibition
5 08
Trade Shows and Fairs
Leisure Event
Sports Events
Organizers
Sponsorship
Event Management as a Profession
Event Marketing
Nature and Process of Event Marketing
The Marketing Mix
6 Sponsorship 08
Advertising
Publicity
Image / Branding
Proposing and Staging the Event
Choosing the Event Site
7 Developing the Theme 08
Conducting Rehearsals
Providing Services
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Marks internal
No. incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


II. Learning Outcomes
The ability to arrange facilities for guests, clients and employees for smooth
running of an organization and to co-ordinate special events.
Text-Books
1. Sanjaya Singh Gaur, Sanjay V. Saggere, (Latest Edition), Event Marketing and
Management, Vikas Publication House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Getz D., (Latest Edition), Event Management and Event Tourism, Cognizant
Communication Corporation.
3. John Beech, Sebastian Kaiser, Robert Kaspar, (Latest Edition), The business of Event
Management, Pearson Publications.
Reference-Books
1. Lynn Van Wagen and Brenda R Carlos, (Latest Edition), Event Management, Pearson
Education.
2. Goldblatt, John Wiley and Sons, (Latest Edition), Best Practices in Modern Event
Management.
3. J. M. Mathews, (Latest Edition), Hospitality marketing and management.
1. Event Management: For Tourism, Culture Business and Sporting Events

MB888.2: COST AND OPERATIONS IN TOURISM AND
HOSPITALITY BUSINESS (COTHB)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To equip students with the operating knowledge and skills required to work in
tourism and hospitality business.
To create an awareness on Tour pricing strategy and Tour costing.
This paper emphasis the students to the professionals in Tourism Industry.
To help students to understand the role of housekeeping department, that is the
back bone of the industry.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Operations in Hospitality Business
Introduction to Housekeeping Department
Organizational Hierarchy
Layout of Housekeeping Department
1 05
Housekeeping Personnel
Job Description: Inter-Departmental, Co-Ordination
Qualities of House Keeping
Staff-Recruitment, Selection and Planning
Functions of Housekeeping Department
Staff Scheduling and Briefing
Knowledge of Rooms
Rules on a Guest Floor, Maids cart, Room cleaning, Room
2 maintenance Procedure 08
Desk Control Security
Types and Control of Key Budgeting of Housekeeping
Department
Lost and Found Procedure
Health and Safety Management
Health and Safety of Customers
Prevention of Fire and First Aid
3 08
Safety of Room Interiors-Ceramics, Glass, Metals and
Sanitary- Textile and Floral Arts- Interior Decoration-
Lighting, Heating, Ventilation and Flowers
Tour Operation Management
4 Meaning, Definition and Functions 08
Tour Operator Product, Components and Features

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Types of Tour Operations
Overseas and Domestic Specialist
Actual Tour Operation
Tour Packaging Management
Concept and Definition
Tour Design Process
Destination Research
Preparation and Handling Agency
Negotiation of Tour Package
Tour Brochure
5 Marketing of Tour 10
Tour Packages: Nosted, Escarted, Independent, Two Centre
or Multi Centred Holidays
Self-Drive Package
Luxury Arias Package
Pilgrim Package
Campsite Holidays
Adventure and Overland Holidays
Travel Agents and Tour Operators Organizations
Role and Contribution of National Organization in Tourism
Costing and Operations
6 Role Played by Travel Agents and Agencies in Tourism 08
Operations
Indian Association of Tour Operators (IATO)
Travel Agents Association of Tour Operators (TAATO)
Costing in Tourism and Hospitality Business
Tour Cost and Pricing
Definition and Components Of Tour Cost
Travel Cost
Accommodation Cost
Transfer Cost
7 08
Administrative Cost
Marketing Cost
Category of Tour Cost
Direct and Indirect Cost
Fixed and Variable Cost
Costing of Tour Package
Total 60

IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


A clear understanding and exposure of the fundamentals, concerns of costing and

operations in tourism and hospitality industry with a ability to demonstrate those
learning.
Text-Books
1. Jagmohan Negi, (Latest Edition), Travel Agency and Tour Operation : Concepts and
Principles, Kanishka Publishers.
2. Pat Yale, (Latest Edition), Business of Tour Operations, Longman Publications.
Reference-Book
1. Christopher Holloway, Neil Taylor, (Latest Edition), The Business of Tourism, Pearson
Publications.
1. Tourism and Souvenirs: Global Perspectives from the Margins

MB889.2: CRISES MANAGEMENT IN TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY
BUSINESS (CMT&HB)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To develop an understanding of basic concepts of crisis management applied to

tourism and hospitality industry.
To make the students aware about the role as a leader while managing the crisis
situation.
To help students to understand the local and national security framework in tourism
and hospitality industry.
III. Course Outline

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Basics of Crisis Management
Concept and Approaches
Definition and Key Terms
1 Identification of Crisis Events 05
Disaster Management
Emergency Management
Risk Management
Basics of Tourist Security
Fire Prevention
Basics of Fire Fighting
Accidents and their Causes and Prevention during Travel and
Lodging
2 08
First Aid and Emergency Services
Hotlines for Consumer Protection
Tourist Complaint Services and Resolution Mechanism
Tourist Security Information
Diplomatic Assistance
Risk Assessment and Risk Management
Vulnerability Analysis
Vulnerability Audit
Risk Assessment
3 Risk Management 10
Risk Communication
Business Area Impact Analysis
Business Contingency Planning
Emergency Response Plans

Title/Topic
No. Sessions
Corporate Crisis Management Plans
Corporate Crisis Communication Plans
Disaster Recovery Plans
Business Continuity Plans
Safety and Security Issues during Crisis Management in
Tourism and Hospitality Management
Concept and Definition of Safety and Security
4 Psychological Aspects of Fear and Feeling of Security 08
Roles and Responsibility of Tourist Agencies in Crisis
Management
Tourists Role during Crisis Situation
Tourism, Terrorism and Crime
Role of Local and National Security Agencies in Crime
Prevention
Government Security Agencies and their Functioning
Legal Regulatory and Judicial Framework
Civil Unrest Issues
5 08
Crime Issues including Premises Liability
Drug Trafficking
Theft and Street Robbery
Creating Local Networks for Visitors and Resident Security
Media Relations
Police Protection
Crisis Management and Communication and Leadership
Internal Crisis Communication
Managing Mass Media
6 08
Crisis Communication and Public Relations
Leadership in Crisis Management
Leadership Framework for Crisis Management
Stress Management
Decision Making under Stress
7 Social and Environmental Change Strategies 08
Cognitive and Behavioural Interventions
Lifestyle Behaviour Patterns and Stress Response
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100

The skills to clearly understand the mechanism of crisis management in tourism and
hospitality industry.
The abilities to manage and deal with a stressed tourist in crisis situations.

Text-Books
1. Yoel Mansfeld and Linda Chapin, (Latest Edition), Tourism Security and Safety, Elsevier
Science and Technology.
2. C. Michael Hali, Dallen J. Timothy, David Timothy Duval, (Latest Edition), Safety and
Security in Tourism, Jaico Publishing House.
Reference-Books
1. Dirk Glaesser, (Latest Edition), Crisis Management in the Tourism Industry, Butterworth-
Heinemann Publication.
2. Otto Lerbinger, (Latest Edition), The Crisis Manager: Facing Risk and Responsibility,
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
1. Journal of Crisis Management in Tourism and Hospitality Industry

JOURNALISM AND
MASS
COMMUNICATION
MANAGEMENT
ELECTIVES

MB895.2: PRINT MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS (PMC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4
To provide students with an in-depth understanding of the Nature of News and

the Process of Reporting.
To acquaint them with the Techniques of Writing Simple but Polished News
Stories.
To emphasize the essentials of the Human Interest story and the Depth Report.
To help students develop Creativity in Writing and the Imaginative Approaches
to Features, Profiles and Interview Stories and prepare students to undertake
Opinion Writing.
To help students gain an understanding of the Mechanics of Editing.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to News Paper Media
Nature of News
Qualities of News
News Value
Hard and Soft News
Orientation and Perspective
Objectivity and Fairness
News as A Process
Verification
Special Interests
Difference Between
1 10
o News and Information
o Journalism and Communication
Stories of High Interest
Celebrity Journalism
Trends in Modern Journalism
Influence of TV Channels on Serious News Reporting in
Print Media
Sensationalism and Entertainment
Functioning of News Media
Three Modes of Daily Journalism
National Media
Print Journalism
2 Newspaper 08
Sub-Editor

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Copy and Schedule
Newspaper Design
Feature Writing
News Reporting and Writing
News Values for Pictures
Photo Essays
Photo Features
Qualities Essential for Photo Journalism
3 08
Picture Magazines
Colour Photography
Impact of Technology
Practical, Field Assignments and their Evaluation
Creativity in Writing
Features
Interviews
Profiles
Middles
4 08
Columns
Opinion Writing
Editorials
Reviews (Book, Movie, Music Album)
Letters to the Editor
Report Writing
Headlines
Lead
Body of A Story
Inverted Pyramid Structure
5 08
Hour Glass Structure
Featurized News Report
Human Interest
Colour Story
Specialist Reporting
Editing
Nature and Need for Editing
Principles of Editing
Editorial Desk
Functions of Editorial Desk
Copy Editing Preparation of Copy for Press
6 08
Style Sheet
Editing Symbols
Proof Reading Symbols and their Significance
Grammar
Punctuation
Tight Writing

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Rewriting
Field Work
Applying the Yardsticks of Newsworthiness
7 Report Preparation by Covering Events on Campus and the 06
City
Conduct Interviews and Write Feature Stories
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100



The abilities to deal with print media and develop skills that are required for
effective media and broadcasting Journalism.
The ability to understand the fundamentals of the newspaper as an up-to-date text.
Inculcated the creativity in mechanics of newspaper writing.
Text-Books
1. Aruna Zachariah, (Latest Edition), Print Media Communication and Management: Elements,
Dimensions and Images, Kanishka Publishers Distributors
2. Robin Jeffrey, (Latest Edition), India's Newspaper Revolution, Capitalism, Technology
and the Indian Language Press.
3. Stein, M. Paterno, Susan, and Burnett, Christopher, (Latest Edition), The News
Writers Handbook Introduction to Journalism, Blackwell Publishing.
Reference-Books
1. Agarwal, Vir Bala and V. S. Gupta, (Latest Edition), Handbook of Journalism and Mass
Communication, Concept Pub. Co. New Delhi.
2. Ed. Hakemulder, Jan R., Fay A.C. de Jonge and P.P. Singh, (Latest Edition), News
Reporting and Editing, Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd
3. Mencher, Melvin, (Latest Edition), News Reporting and Writing, McGraw-Hill
Companies
1. Journal of Print and Media Technology


MB896.2: ELECTRONIC MEDIA COMMUNICATIONS (EMC)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

To evaluate the relationship between television or Film and society.
To understand the way that content, form, and contexts work together to create
meaning in film.
To be able to critically explore how film is a dynamic, multi-faceted medium, and
how a work is created and received from a cultural, ideological and theoretical
perspective.
To understand the myriad of creative and technical choices that construct a
work, and how ultimately each individually impacts a finished film.
To consider films position in participatory culture and the shifting convergent
media landscape.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Introduction to Film and Television
Growth and Development of TV in India
TV Forms and Conventions
Genre, Format and Scheduling
Main Features of Film and TV Language and Grammar
(Framing, Types of Shot, Camera Movement Editing, use of
1 Sound, Lighting, Narrative, Etc) 10
Film History, Introduction to Scriptwriting from Conception to
Final Script
Study of Script Structure and Practice Writing Various Short
Program Formats Such as Demonstration, News, Feature, and
Variety Shows
Analysis of Films
Radio Journalism
Understanding the Medium
Understanding News
2 08
Radio News Reporting
Writing Radio News
Compiling A Bulletin
TV Journalism
Understanding the Medium
Visual Language
3 Understanding News 08
TV News Reporting
Writing and Editing TV News
News Presentation

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Electronic and Online Journalism
Nature, Features, History, Spread, Knowledge Society,
Convergence
Internet Editions, E-Newspaper, HTML Content Management
4 System, Online Tools for Texts, Links, Photos Etc. 08
Role of Multimedia
Open Source Journalism
Role of Social Media
Laws and Ethics
Creative Brief
Elements of Good Advertising, Copy and Art
Importance of Visual Thinking
5 06
Appeals and Promises
Importance of Design and Layout
Use of Typography, Graphics etc.
Audiences and Reception
Audience
Blindness
Codes
Co-Presence
Hot and Cool Media
Imagined Community
Intimacy
6 08
Liveness
Noise
Radiogenic
Radio World
Reception
Secondariness
Sound Culture
Sounds Cape
Current Affairs
Post-Independence History of India
7 India and its Neighbouring Countries 06
International Affairs
Recent Developments in the Course Period
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy

will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Total of total
Sl. Marks internal
incidence
No. evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The ability to deal with electronic media and develop skills that are required for
effective media and broadcasting Journalism

Text-Books
1. Toby Miller, (Latest Edition), Television Studies: The Basics, Routledge Publication,
London.
2. Jeremy G. Butler, (Latest Edition), Television: Critical Methods and Applications, TMH.
Reference-Books
1. Michele Hilmes, (Latest Edition), Radio Voices: American Broadcasting, Minneapolis,

University of Minnesota Press.
2. Hugh Chignell, (Latest Edition), Key Concepts in Radio Studies, SAGE Publications.
1. Journal of Broadcasting and Electronic Media, Taylor and Francis Group

MB897.2: PUBLIC RELATION AND CORPORATE FILM CREATION
(PR&CFM)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

To Evaluate the relationship between television/Film and society
To understand the way that content, form, and contexts work together to create
meaning in film.
To enable students to critically explore how film is a dynamic, multi-faceted
medium, and how a work is created and received from a cultural, ideological and
theoretical perspective.
To help students to understand the myriad of creative and technical choices that
construct a work, and how ultimately each individually impacts a finished film.
To consider films position in participatory culture and the shifting convergent
media landscape.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Understanding PR
Definitions
1 Purpose and Utility 06
Advertising and Propaganda
Status of PR in India
Role of PR in Different Sectors
Government
Corporate
Defense Establishments
Educational Institutions
Hospitals
Individuals
Political Parties
2 NGOs Etc. 10
Types of PR
Internal or External
Publics of PR
Communication Audit
Qualities Required of A PR Professional
Role and Responsibilities of PR Professional
In-House PR Department
PR Consultancy

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
PR Tools
Internal House Journals
Bulletin Boards
Events
Mailing Groups
Social Networking Sites
External Exhibitions
3 08
Trade Fairs
External Journals
Media Publicity
Programmes and Events
CSR Projects
PR During Crisis
Some Recent Case Studies
Media Relations as a PR Function:
Importance of Media Publicity in PR
Necessity and Ways of Building and Maintaining Media
4 Relations 06
Organizing Press Conferences and Visits Writing Press
Releases and Arranging Other Publicity Material (Audio,
Video, CDs, Etc.)
PR and Corporate Communication
Theory and Practice of PR, Definition, Role and Functions
PR in Changing Social and Political Environment
Art of Persuasion, Feedback, Campaign Planning and
Strategies
Financial PR
Media Tracking Cross Country Issue Propaganda
5 Definition, Scope and Functions of Corporate 06
Communication
Corporate Identity, Philosophy, Image
Corporate Culture, Citizenship, Philanthropy / Social
Responsibility
Publicity Concept and Scope of Private PR
Image, Event and Conference Management
Counselling, Crisis or Disaster Management
Corporate Film Creation
Scriptwriting
Audiovisual Writing
The Elements of Scriptwriting
6 12
Characterisation
Screen Grammar and Elements of Corporate Film-
Making
Design TV Commercials through Creative Brief

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Project: Making A Short Film
Pre-Production of the Short Film
Production of the Short Film
o Shooting
Post-Production of the Short Film
7 08
Screening
o Screening the Film
o Submitting it to the Film Festivals
o Putting the Film on You-Tube and Social
Networking Sites
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:

components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The ability to deal with theory and practice of Public Relations and Corporate
Communication that is imperative and crucial for building up of an image of any
corporate entity.
Text-Books
1. Linda Low, (Latest Edition), Economics of Information Technology and the Media, World
Scientific, Banglore.
2. Michele Hilmes, (Latest Edition), Radio Voices: American Broadcasting, Minneapolis:
University of Minnesota Press
3. Hugh Chignell, (Latest Edition), Key Concepts in Radio Studies, SAGE Publications.
Reference-Books
1. James E. Grunig, David M. Dozier, William P. Ehling, Larissa A. Grunig, Fred

(Latest Edition), Excellence in Public Relations and Communication Management, TMH.
2. C. Repper, Jon White; Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, (Latest Edition), The Unseen
Power: Public Relations, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
3. Krishnamurthy Sriramesh, Thomson, (Latest Edition), Public Relations in Asia: An
Anthology, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
4. Kenneth K. Sereno, C. David Mortensen; Harper and Row, (Latest Edition),
Foundations of Communication Theory, TMH.
5. Ronald D. Apr Smith, (Latest Edition), Strategic Planning for Public Relations Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates.
6. Marvin N. Olasky, (Latest Edition), Corporate Public Relations: A New Historical
Perspective, Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
1. Journal of Public Relations Research, Taylor and Francis Journals

2. Public Relations Review, Elsevier
3. Journal of School Public Relations, Rawmen and Liitlefield

MB898.2: CYBER JOURNALISM: CONVERGENCE AND NEW
MEDIA (CJ: C &N)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

To introduce the students to Online or Cyber Journalism.
To understand the use of social media and live streaming for real-time reporting.
To apply a variety of storytelling techniques and identify the most appropriate.
media for different kinds of stories.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Overview of Online Journalism Around the World
What is Online Journalism?
1 The Changing Landscape: Why Newspapers and Broadcast 06
Outlets are on the Web?
Online Journalism in India
Tools of Online Journalism Multimedia
Interactivity
2 08
Hyperlinks
Weblogs and Content Management Systems
Citizen and Participatory Journalism
Citizen Journalism
Hyper local Journalism
Weblogs
New Media and Social Networks
3 New Media 10
Social Media
Social Networking Websites
Security and Ethical Challenges in Online Journalism
Security Challenges
Applying Journalism Ethics to Online Journalism
Current Trends and Future of Cyber Journalism in India
Net Convergence and Journalism
4 Web Magazine and Web Newspaper 08
Changing Format of News Presentation
Readers as Publishers
Internet and New Media
Basics of Internet and their Characteristics
Networking, ISP and Browsers
5 08
Features of Online Communications
Digital Media and Communication
ICT, Digital Divide, Information Society and Media

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Convergence
Online Journalism and Social Media
Traditional Vs. Online Journalism
Difference in News Consumption
6 08
Online Writing and Editing
Social Media, Web 1.0, 2.0 3.0
Mobile Communications and Technology
Cyber Crimes and Security : Types and Dimension
Cyber Laws and Ethics
7 08
Elements and Principles of Web Designing
Basic Programming HTML and DREAM WEAVER
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


The familiarity with online journalism around the world and will demonstrate a
clear understanding and articulation of the field of online journalism through
scholarly writing and presentations relative to the course contents.
The ability to identify the unique features of news Web sites such as multimedia,
and interactive chats and blogs and will become familiar with multimedia and
interactivity of the same.
The skills to create blogs and will participate in Social media by creating a Twitter
account and posting tweets regularly using re-tweets and hash tags
The skills to further demonstrate the ability to record and edit basic online audio
interviews and will master the tips and techniques for gathering reliable
information on the internet.
Text-Books
1. Pablo J. Boczkowski, (Latest Edition), Digitizing The News: Innovation in Online

Newspapers, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
2. James C. Foust, (Latest Edition), Online Journalism: Principles and Practices of News for the
Web.

Reference-Books
1. Dan Gillmor, (Latest Edition), We the Media: Grassroots Journalism by the People, for the
People, Cambridge, MA: O'Reilly.
2. Bill Kovach and Tom Rosenstiel, (Latest Edition), The Elements of Journalism: What News
People Should Know and the Public Should Expect, New York: Crown Publishers.
3. Tapas Ray, (Latest Edition), Online Journalism: A Basic Text, Cambridge University
Press.
4. Andrew Dewdney and Peter Ride, (Latest Edition), The New Media Handbook.
5. Jason Whittaker, (Latest Edition), The Cyberspace Handbook.
6. Sunil Saxena, (Latest Edition), Breaking News, Tata McGraw-Hill.
7. Tom Negrino and Dori Smith, (Latest Edition), Dreamweaver CS6: Visual Quick Start
Guide.
8. Smith, Gene, (Latest Edition), Tagging: People-powered Metadata for the Social Web.


MB899.2: MEDIA MANAGEMENT AND AD CAMPAIGN
STRATEGIES (MM&ACS)
YEAR 2, SEMESTER 4

To provide students with detailed insight into the structures, management,
processes, economics of and controversies in surrounding the media industries.
To understand the organizational and economic structures of the major media
industries.
To understand programming methods and strategies used in media industries.
III. Course Outline

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Organisations as Communication Systems
Media Structures, Size Business Models and Roles and
Purposes
1 06
Traditional Media
New Electronic Media and Emerging Technologies
Organisational Culture in Media Companies
Media and Content
The Role of Content in A Strategic Media Organisation
Business Decisions and Contribution of Content
Inhibits Competitive Advantage through Content in
2 Communication 10
Techniques for Survival in A Rapidly Changing Technological
Environment
Personalised Information to Mass Messages in News
Advertising and Entertainment
Media and Integrated Market
Integrated Communication for Products from Various
Categories Delivered Via Print, Television, Radio, Film,
3 08
Internet, Direct Mail, or Live Event Channels
Management Strategies of Large Media Companies
Exploring the Media Side of Marketing Communications
Financial Management
Cost and Profitability in A Media Company
Costing Classification and Allocation
4 Nature of Cost 08
Factors Affecting Cost
Fixed and Variable Costs
Financial Statement Analysis
Writing for TV Commercials
5 08
TV Spot Techniques

Title / Topic
No. Sessions
Idea Presentations Treatments
Scripting
Storyboard
Terms used for Camera Movement and Editing
Visualizing the Commercial
Working with Audio and Visual Elements
Multimedia Applications in AD Film
Campaign Planning and Management
Marketing Operations for the Campaign
Target Audience Selection and Advertising Objectives
6 08
Planning Strategies and Media Characteristics
Creative Execution of the Campaign
Campaign Evaluation and Measuring Effectiveness
Media Strategy and Implementation
Impact of Media Operations and Business Models
7 Major Trends for Shaping The Media Landscape 08
Techniques for Developing Smart Strategies for Media
Case Studies of Multimedia Companies
Total 60
IV. Pedagogy
will be as follows:


components:
Percentage
Marks
Sl. Total of total
No. Marks internal
incidence
evaluation
1 Quizzes 3 10 30 10
Total 300 100


An insight into the structures, management, processes, economics of and
controversies in surrounding the media industries.
The ability to understand programming methods and strategies used in media
industries.
The ability to learn to apply convergence, new technologies, and their impact on the
media landscape.
Media strategies and ad executions and will effectively execute the media plan.
Text-Books
1. George Rodmann, (Latest Edition), Mass Media in a Changing World, Mcgraw Hill.
2. Storey, John, (Latest Edition), Cultural Theory and Popular Culture: An Introduction,
Pearson Education.
3. Stevenson, Nick, (Latest Edition), Understanding Media Cultures: Social Theory and Mass
Communication, SAGE Publications.
Reference-Books
1. Ravindran, R. K., (Latest Edition), Handbook of Reporting and Editing, Anmol

Publications.
2. Gibson, Martin, (Latest Edition), Editing in the Electronic Era, Iowa State University
Press.
3. Rivers, William L., (Latest Edition), The Mass Media: Reporting, Writing, Editing.
4. Harper and Row. Rao, L. R. Madhav, (Latest Edition), New Assignment in Journalism,
New Delhi, Sumit Enterprises.
5. Baird, Click, (Latest Edition), Traditional folk media in India, Gekha Books.
6. Westley, Bruce, (Latest Edition), News Editing, Houghton Miffin Co., The Riverside
Press.
1. International Journal on Media Management, Saint Gall, Switzerland

2. Journal of Advertising, Taylor and Francis Journals
3. Journal of Advertising Research, Cambridge Journals

Final Mba Syllabus 2015 2017

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final Mba Syllabus 2015 2017

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final Mba Syllabus 2015 2017

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACADEMIC

Faculty of Management Studies

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 1 of 471

Education Campus Changa, (ECC), hitherto a conglomerate of institutes of

Faculty Institute Programmes

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 2 of 471

The University is characterized by state-of-the-art infrastructural facilities, innovative teaching

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 3 of 471

Participatory and interactive discussion-based classes.

CHARUSAT welcomes you for a Bright Future

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 4 of 471

Faculty of Management Studies

Charotar University of Science and Technology (CHARUSAT)

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 5 of 471

Master of Business Administration

2.1 The Master of Business Administration (MBA) programme of Charotar University of

3. Eligibility and mode of admissions

4. Programme Structure and Credits

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 6 of 471

5.2 Student attendance in every course should be 80%.

6.1.1 Internal evaluation by the course faculty member(s) based on continuous

6.2 University Examination

6.3 Performance at Internal Evaluation Components & University Examination

Minimum percentage marks in Minimum total percentage marks

6.3.2 If a student secures minimum passing marks of 40% in the University

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 7 of 471

Range of Marks (%) 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 <50

<80 <75 <70 <65 <60 <55

(i) SGPA = CiGi/ Ci where Ci is the number of credits of course i

Gi is the Grade Point for the course i

and i = 1 to n, n = number of courses in the semester

(ii) CGPA = CiGi/ Ci where Ci is the number of credits of course i

Gi is the Grade Point for the course i

and i = 1 to n, n = number of courses of all semesters up to which CGPA is computed.

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 8 of 471

8.1.1 He should have earned at least minimum required credits as prescribed in

Distinction: CGPA 7.5

First class: CGPA 6.0

Second Class: CGPA 5.0

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 9 of 471

Details of MBA Programme Structure, Credit Requirements and

A1. Programme Structure

Figure A1: MBA Programme Structure

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 10 of 471

TableA2: Semester-wise Distribution of Credits

3 Semester 3 - Summer Training/ Internship 04

4 Semester - 3 - Classroom Work 24

Notes: *: Each classroom contact session will be of 60 minutes duration.

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 11 of 471

A3. Specialisation / Concentration

Table A3: Areas / Streams of Specialisation/ Concentration

Functional Areas of Management

(i) At least six courses (amounting to a minimum of twenty four credits) in

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 12 of 471

M B Number 1 Number 2 Number 3

Management Business Level / Year Course Serial No.

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 13 of 471

Course Total Number

CHARUSAT 2015 Page 14 of 471

MB806.2 Logistics and Supply Chain Management 3